JP2016010607A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of outputting more detailed information to an external device.SOLUTION: Simplex information output means controls simplex information being individual information so as to be respectively outputted from a plurality of output parts to an external device. Composite information output means controls composite information being information to be outputted by using two or more output parts among the plurality of output parts so as to be outputted to the external device. Information output means sets a period in which the simplex information output means outputs the simplex information, and a period in which the composite information output means outputs the composite information in a prescribed period that is determined in advance. Thus, the information output means can output the simplex information and the composite information during the prescribed period. Then, more detailed information can be effectively outputted to the external device without increasing the output parts.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines output information to an external device such as a hall computer. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to make an external device know information related to the gaming machine based on the output information.

Japanese Patent No. 3848105

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the information that can be output is limited, and it is difficult for the external device to grasp the detailed information of the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of outputting more detailed information to an external device.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a plurality of output units for outputting information to an external device that performs predetermined processing based on information output from the gaming machine. Information output means, single information output means for outputting individual information that is individual information from a plurality of output sections of the information output means, and two or more of the plurality of output sections of the information output means Composite information output means for outputting composite information that is information output using the output unit, wherein the information output means causes the single information output means to output the single information during a predetermined period. A period and a period for outputting the composite information by the composite information output means are set at least.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information output means performs predetermined processing based on a signal received from the gaming machine until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. The single information and the composite information can be output to an external device that performs the above.

  A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, in which gaming information is stored, and storage means capable of holding the stored information for at least a predetermined period after the power is shut off, and Control means for performing control related to the game based on the game information stored in the storage means, and the unit information corresponds to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means. The composite information is information corresponding to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means, and corresponds to game information different from the game information corresponding to the single information. It is.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, information is output to the external device by a plurality of output units included in the information output means, and single information that is individual information is output from the plurality of output units. It is controlled by single information output means. Further, the composite information output means controls so that composite information that is information output using two or more output units among the plurality of output units is output. During a predetermined period, the information output unit sets a period for outputting the single information by the single information output unit and a period for outputting the composite information by the composite information output unit.

  Thereby, single information and composite information can be output from the information output means in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that more detailed information can be output to the external device without increasing the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the unit information and the composite information are transmitted by the information output means until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. Since it is output to the external device, there is an effect that more types of information can be output to the external device when the power is turned on.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, game information is stored in the storage means, and the information stored in the storage means is held for a predetermined time after the power is turned off. Based on the game information stored in the storage unit, the control unit controls the game. Further, single information corresponds to at least a part of game information stored in the storage means, and composite information corresponds to game information different from game information corresponding to the single information.

  Thereby, since more game information can be output to the external device, there is an effect that the external device can grasp more detailed game information of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a lottery apparatus. (A) is a perspective view of a 2nd variable winning apparatus and a traveling direction distribution part, (b) is a front view of a 2nd variable winning apparatus and a traveling direction distribution part. (A) is a top view of a 2nd variable winning apparatus and a traveling direction distribution part, (b) is sectional drawing of a 2nd variable winning apparatus and a traveling direction distribution part. It is a figure which shows how to distribute the advancing direction of a game ball by the advancing direction distribution part of a lottery apparatus. (A) is a perspective view at the time of observing the entrance entrance distribution part from the front right direction, (b) is a perspective view at the time of observing the entrance entrance distribution part from the front left direction. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st entrance opening distribution part. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a sorting rotary body. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a near route in the state where the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball | bowl passes a back route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a near route in the state which the distribution rotary body of the lottery apparatus swung to the left. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary in case a game ball passes a back | inner route in the state where the distribution rotary body of the lottery device swung to the left. (A) is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a time change of a 2nd large opening and a traveling direction distribution part, when it becomes a front route jackpot, (b) is a figure when a back route jackpot is reached. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the time change of a 2 large opening | mouth and an advancing direction distribution part. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main controller, (b) shows typically the correspondence between the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the jackpot classification in 5th Embodiment, and the state of the 2nd large opening for every time-counter value, (b) is 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the jackpot classification in and the state of the advancing direction distribution part for every time-counter value. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in a main controller. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output from an external output terminal board in normal time. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output from an external output terminal board at the time of power activation, and the detection of a power failure. (A) is the time chart which showed the time change of the signal output from CN1 of an external output terminal board at normal time, (b) is the signal output from CN2 and CN8 of an external output terminal board at normal time 6 is a time chart showing a specific example of the change in time measurement, and (c) is a time chart showing the change in time measurement of signals output from CN3, CN4, CN10, and CN11 of the external output terminal plate at normal time. (A) is the time chart which showed the time change of the signal output from CN5 and CN7 of an external output terminal board at normal time, (b) is the signal output from CN6 of an external output terminal board at normal time 6 is a time chart showing a specific example of a change in time of the above, and (c) is a time chart showing a change in time of a signal output from the CN 9 of the external output terminal plate at a normal time. It is the time chart which showed the time change of the signal which is output from each output channel of the external output signal when it is the big hit state at the time of power on. It is the time chart which showed the time change of the signal which is output from each output channel of the external output signal when it is in the short time state at the time of power on, and when the design is changing. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection of the pachinko machine installed in the hall, and an external device. (A) is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the hall computer, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a first data storage area provided in a hard disk of the hall computer. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the external output signal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the out sphere detection signal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning signal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage signal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the open signal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the state confirmation process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM initialization signal output process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the signal output process at the time of starting performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the rotary body position initialization process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the round start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd large opening setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the flow-path setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the rotary body position detection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the signal output process at the time of a power failure performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lending control process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the control apparatus of a hall computer. It is the flowchart which showed the signal reception process performed by the control apparatus of a hall computer. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison process at the time of a power recovery performed by the control apparatus of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal normally output from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output at the time of power activation from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment, and at the time of the detection of a power failure. It is the time chart which showed the time change of the signal output from each output channel of the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 1st data storage area provided in the hard disk of the hall computer in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the power-off notification process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the power-on notification process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the flag setting process performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the signal reception process 2 performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output at the time of the normal time and the single pin output mode from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the classification | category of the external output signal output at the time of the normal time and multi-pin output mode from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output at the time of power activation from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, the detection of a power failure, and a single pin output mode. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output at the time of power-on from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, the time of a power-off detection, and a multi-pin output mode. It is the time chart which showed the time change of the signal output from each output channel of the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the 1st data storage area provided in the hard disk of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the signal output process 2 at the time of starting performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the multi-pin output process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit classification notification process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the signal reception process 3 performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reception process at the time of a power failure performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the receiving process at the time of starting performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal time reception process performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the CIIIa-CIIIa cross section of the 1st variable prize apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment, (b) is CIIIb- of the 1st variable prize apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a CIIIb cross section, (c) is a top view of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a partial rear view of the 1st variable winning apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal normally output from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the classification of the external output signal output at the time of power activation from the external output terminal board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment, and the detection of a power-off. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state confirmation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormal process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the comparison process at the time of a power recovery performed by the control apparatus of the hall computer in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is won for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls are won). Until it is released), and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls wins at the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. In addition, the 1st specific winning opening 65a opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a lot of balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. “Big jackpot A” and “Big jackpot B” are jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of eight. Among the eight rounds of jackpots, in the second to eighth rounds, a state in which a game ball can enter the first variable winning device 65 provided below the game board 13 in front view (that is, the first round) 1 specific winning port 65a is opened). On the other hand, in the first round of the jackpot, the second specific prize opening 140a provided on the right side of the front view with respect to the game board 13 is opened, and a game ball can enter the second variable prize winning device 140. . In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the payout of the winning ball is executed based on the game ball entering the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 140a. Therefore, the player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls than usual by launching game balls aiming at the large opening that is opened in each round.

  “Big jackpot A” and “Big jackpot B” are paths through which a game ball passes in a lottery drawing to a high probability state of a special symbol performed by the lottery device 700 (see FIG. 5) after winning of the jackpot is confirmed. Is a channel on the front side (front route) of the sorting rotator 741 or a channel on the heel side (back route). That is, in the “big hit A”, the second specific winning opening 140a is opened during the period when the flow path switching valve 731 switches to the rear flow path (back route), and the game ball can enter the lottery device 700. It will be in a state (refer to Drawing 8 (b)). On the other hand, in the “big hit B”, the second specific winning opening 140a is opened during the period when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the flow path on the near side (front route), and game balls can enter the lottery device 700. It will be in a state (refer to Drawing 8 (a)). As shown in FIG. 2, the lottery device 700 is provided on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the game board 13.

  Here, the “front side” and the “back side” of the sorting rotator 741 respectively indicate the front side or the back side for the player. Specifically, in the case of the channel on the near side (route on the near side), it is a channel on the side closer to the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 (the side far from the base plate 60), In the case of a flow path (back route), it is a flow path on the side farther from the player (the side closer to the base plate 60).

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 16, but according to the flow path through which the game balls flow and the state of the distribution rotating body 741 disposed immediately below the flow path switching valve 731. It is assigned to which entrance the game ball enters from among the short time entrance 501 and the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 provided below the rotating body 741. When a game ball enters the short time entrance 501, the special symbol is shifted to a low probability state after the jackpot and the normal symbol time is reduced for a predetermined number of times of change (for example, the number of times of change is 100 times). It becomes a state. On the other hand, when a game ball enters any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504, the game moves to a high probability state with a special symbol after the big hit.

When the flow path switching valve 731 is set to the flow path on the near side (front path), the game balls that have entered the lottery device 700 are sorted by the sorting rotator 741 so that the time-shortening entrance 501 and the probability variation entrance Therefore, when the game is distributed to the short-time entrance 501, the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the jackpot and the normal symbol is used for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). It becomes short state. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the probability variation entrance 503 by the distribution rotating body 741, the game shifts to a special symbol high probability state after the jackpot. On the other hand, when it is set to the back side flow path (the dredging route), the game balls that have entered the lottery device 700 are placed in either the probability variation entrance port 502 or the probability variation entrance port 504 by the distribution rotating body 741. Sorted. Therefore, when it is set to the channel on the back side (the back route), it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot.
In addition, a lottery device 700 is provided inside the second variable winning device 140 for lottering whether or not to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot is finished. Although details will be described later, by this lottery device 700, the type of the entrance into which the game balls that entered the inside of the second variable prize-winning device 140 are initially distributed (the short-time entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrance) 502 to 504), the gaming state after the jackpot is finished (whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol) is determined.

  In addition, the sorting rotator 741 is configured to be swingable to the left and right, and has a different entrance that allows game balls to be sorted according to the swinging direction. Specifically, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, it becomes possible to sort the game balls to the probability variation ball opening 502 or the probability variation ball opening 504, and the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right. In this case, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the short time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 503. In other words, when the lottery device 700 performs a lottery, the sorting rotator 741 is always in a state of winning a high probability state of a special symbol advantageous to the player (a state of swinging to the left) and a low probability state of a special symbol. Two types of states can be taken: a state in which there is a possibility of being a state (a state where it has swung to the right). Accordingly, it is advantageous for the player to have the sorting rotator 741 swinging to the left side, and therefore, the player can be pleased by having the sorting rotator 741 swing to the left. .

  Further, even if the player is not paying attention to the state of the sorting rotator 741, the player can be aware that the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left (that is, a state advantageous to the player). In order to suppress the quitting of the game, different effects are executed in conjunction with the state of the sorting rotator 741. That is, in a state where the sorting rotating body 741 swings to the left side, a special effect (loop state effect) is generated so that the player can easily recognize that the special state is different from the normal state. It is composed.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability of the special symbol is changing (the probability of the special symbol is being changed). In other words, the game state is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the “low probability state of a special symbol” refers to a time when the probability change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. In addition, the “short-time state (short-time)” of the normal symbol in the “low probability state of the special symbol” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased. It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It should be noted that instead of changing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or the amount of time per hit It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening an electrically-driven accessory.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. In the case of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which any number from “0” to “9” is added are arranged. That is, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that it cannot be distinguished whether it is “big hit A” or “big hit B”. As described above, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed on the LED 37a. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the lottery device 700 in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted forward (that is, a state where the back side flow path 732b is opened) (see FIG. 8 (a)), it will enter either the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504, and even if it enters any entrance, it will go to a high probability state of a special symbol after jackpot And migrate. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lottery device 700 in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side (that is, a state where the near-side flow path 732a is opened) (FIG. 8B). Reference), it will enter either the short time entrance 501 or the probability variation entrance 503, and there is a possibility of shifting to a low probability state of a special symbol after jackpot. Further, as described above, in the case of “big hit A”, the second specific prize winning opening 140a is opened during a period in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side. Therefore, since winning the “big hit A” is more advantageous to the player than winning the “big hit B”, the player is expected to win the “big hit A”. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (8 round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning port 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning port 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is configured to be repeatable seven times (from the second round to the eighth round). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for driving the opening / closing operation forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area has a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the first specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the first specific winning port 65a is set for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins the first specific winning port 65a while the first specific winning port 65a is opened. The released gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state.

  A second variable winning device 140 is provided in the right direction of the front of the variable display device unit 80, and a lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140. As a result, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a of the second variable winning apparatus are guided to the lottery apparatus 700. In addition, since the lottery device 700 is provided on the inner side with respect to the surface of the game board 13, the lottery device 700 does not prevent the progress of the game ball. In addition, among the board surfaces of the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the portion on the near side of the lottery device 700 is configured by a transparent member, so that the player can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It can be confirmed during the game that the game balls that entered the ball flow down inside the lottery device 700.

  Next, an overview of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an overview of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140, and enters the second variable winning device 140 through the second specific winning port (second large opening) 140 a. All of the game balls that have entered are configured to flow down to the lottery device 700. In addition, the lottery device 700 has a traveling direction sorting unit 730 for causing the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 140a to flow down to either the front channel 732a or the rear channel 732b, and the progression thereof. The game ball that has flowed down the direction distribution unit 730 is configured with a ball entrance distribution unit 740 that distributes the game balls to any of the entrances (hour-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504). The joint portion between the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 will be described with reference to the following FIGS.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the second variable winning device 140 and a flow path provided in the second variable winning device 140 and continuing to the lottery device 700. As shown in FIG. 6A, the second variable winning device 140 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped region in which a game ball can enter through the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. ing. A lottery device guide hole 141 leading to the entrance entrance distributing portion 740 is provided at the center of the bottom surface of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped region. All game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the lottery device guide hole 141.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the second variable prize winning device 140 are provided with inclinations (inclined portions 142a and 142b) in such a direction that the game ball descends in the direction of the lottery device guide hole 141. It has been. In addition, the inclined portions 142a and 142b are configured such that the upper end of the inclination is the same height as the lower side of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. As a result, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are restrained from staying inside the second variable winning device 140, and are reliably transferred to the lottery device guide hole 141. You can enter.

  Downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141, the traveling direction for distributing the game balls to the channel on the front side in the front view (front side channel 732a) or the channel on the back side in the front view (back side channel 732b). A distribution unit 730 is provided. A flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 7B) for switching the flow path in which the game ball travels is provided inside the traveling direction distribution unit 730. When the game ball is distributed to the front side flow path 732a by the flow path switching valve 731, the ball enters the front route guide hole 742a provided on the front side of the top surface of the entrance distribution part 740 and is distributed and rotated. Proceed through the channel on the near side of the body 741 (the near route). On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the back channel 732b, the game ball enters the back route guide hole 742b provided on the back side of the top surface of the entrance distribution portion 740, and the back side of the distribution rotating body 741 It advances in the flow path (back route).

  Next, the traveling direction sorting unit 730 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7A is a plan view of the second variable winning device 140 as seen from above, and FIG. 7B shows the second variable winning device 140 and the traveling direction distribution unit 730 in FIG. 7A. It is sectional drawing at the time of cut | disconnecting by the VIIb-VIIb line | wire shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a lottery device guide hole 141 is provided in the center of the bottom surface inside the second variable winning device 140. Further, a flow path switching valve 731 for switching the flow path through which the game balls flow down is provided downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141. The drive shaft 731a of the flow path switching valve 731 is electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265 (see FIG. 17), and the drive shaft 731a is controlled by controlling the flow path solenoid 265 (see FIG. 17). Is configured such that the flow path switching valve 731 is rotatable. Thereby, the flow path switching valve 731 can be tilted toward the near side or the far side. In addition, as described above, on the downstream side of the flow path switching valve 731, the front side flow path 732 a is provided on the front side in front view, and the back side flow path 732 b is provided on the back side in front view.

  Next, the flow path switching valve 731 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 (a) is cut along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7 (a) in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the front side (tilted) by controlling the flow path solenoid 265. It is sectional drawing in the case. As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the near side, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 comes into contact with the inner wall portion on the near side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the near-side flow path 732a is shielded by the flow-path switching valve 731 and the game ball cannot enter the near-side flow path 732a. On the other hand, the back channel 732b is open at the top, allowing the game ball to travel. For this reason, in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the near side, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning port 140a flows down the back side flow path 732b.

  FIG. 8B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line VIIb-VIIb (see FIG. 7A) in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched (tilted) to the back side. As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the back side, the tip end portion of the flow path switching valve 731 comes into contact with the inner wall portion on the back side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the back side flow path 732b is shielded by the flow path switching valve 731 and the game ball cannot enter the back side flow path 732b. On the other hand, the upper side of the near-side channel 732a is open, and the game ball can be advanced. For this reason, in a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the back side, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down the front flow path 732a.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the tip of the flow path switching valve 731 (that is, the portion in contact with the inner wall of the traveling direction distribution portion 730) is positioned higher than the drive shaft 731a. It becomes. That is, the flow path switching valve 731 is inclined in a direction downward toward the drive shaft 731a. This prevents the game ball that has reached the flow path switching valve 731 from stopping on the flow path switching valve 731, and ensures that any flow path (the near-side flow path 732 a or the back-side flow path). 732b) can flow down. Therefore, the game ball can be reliably advanced to the lottery device 700.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 15, the entrance allocating unit 740 provided in the lottery device 700 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the structure of the entrance allocating unit 740. FIG. 9A is a front perspective view when the entrance allocator 740 is observed from the front right direction, and FIG. 9B is a view when the entrance allocator 740 is observed from the front left direction. It is a front perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), the ball entrance sorting unit 740 includes a sorting rotating body 741, and forms a channel through which game balls travel, and its channel. The cover member 744 a is attached to the front side of the forming part 743, and the cover member 744 b is attached to the back side of the flow path forming part 743.

  A front route guide hole 742a is formed on the front side of the front view on the upper surface of the entrance distribution portion 740, and a back route guide hole 742b is formed on the back side of the front view. As described above, the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a travels along the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotation body 741, and the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b is sorted and rotated. It travels through the flow path (back route) on the back side of the body 741.

  On the right side of the entrance distribution unit 740, there are a probability variation entrance 503 (front side in front view) and a probability variation entrance 504 (back side in front view) as entrances into which game balls are distributed by the distribution rotating body 741. ) Is provided (see FIG. 9A). In addition, on the left side of the entrance divide unit 740, as the entrance to which the game balls are distributed by the allocation rotating body 741, the short-time entrance 501 (front side in front view) and the probability variation entrance sphere 502 (front view). (Refer to FIG. 9B). After the start of the jackpot, when the entrance to which the game ball is first distributed is the hour-short entrance 501, the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the entrance to which the game balls are initially distributed is the probability change entrances 502 to 504, the game proceeds to a high probability state with a special symbol after the jackpot is over.

  The game balls that have entered the entrances are detected by any of the winning sensors 420a to 420d corresponding to the entrances. More specifically, a winning sensor 420a for detecting a gaming ball that has passed through the time-shortening entrance 501; a winning sensor 420b for detecting a gaming ball that has passed through the probability variation entrance 502; and a probability variation entrance A winning sensor 420c for detecting a gaming ball that has passed 503 and a winning sensor 420b for detecting a gaming ball that has passed the probability variation entrance 504 are provided. Based on the detection results of these sensors, It is configured to be able to specify the type of entrance into which a game ball has entered. The game balls detected by the winning sensor are discharged to the outside of the lottery device 700.

  Further, since the flow path forming portion 743 and the cover members 744a and 744b are made of a transparent material (for example, PS material), a game that has entered the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b. The player can visually check the progress of the game ball until the ball enters any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 or probability variation entrances 502-504).

  FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the entrance allocating unit 740. The flow path forming portion 743 is provided with an area for storing the substantially fan-shaped distribution rotating body 741 immediately below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. That is, the sorting rotator 741 is disposed directly below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. In addition, the sorting rotator 741 is configured to be swingable left and right about the substantially cylindrical rotator support shafts 806a and 806b. You can change the entrance of the ball. The relationship between the direction in which the sorting rotator 741 is swinging and the entrance into which the game ball enters will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In order to insert the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b of the sorting rotating body 741, the cover member 744a mounted on the front side of the flow path forming unit 743 and the cover member 744b mounted on the back side, respectively. Bearing portions 746a and 746b are provided. Each of the bearing portions 746a and 746b has a shape recessed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and the radius of the recessed portion is slightly larger than the radius of the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b (that is, the rotating body support shaft in the recessed portion). 806a and 806b can be inserted and can be freely rotated). When the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b are inserted into the bearing portions 746a and 746b, respectively. The sorting rotator 741 can be stably swung as a rotating shaft.

  Further, on the surface of the cover member 744a on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guide passages 745a and 745c are provided that allow the game balls that have traveled along the flow path on the near side (front route) of the sorting rotator 741 to flow down the top surface. It has been. The guide passage 745a is a passage inclined in a downward direction toward the time-shortening entrance 501. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has progressed to the guide passage 745a can be made to flow down to the short time entrance 501. Further, the guide passage 745c is a passage that is inclined downward toward the probability variation entrance 503. By this inclination, the game ball that has progressed to the guide passage 745c can flow down to the probability variation entrance 503.

  On the other hand, on the surface of the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guide passages 745b and 745d through which the game balls that have traveled through the flow path (back route) on the rear side of the sorting rotating body 741 can flow down are provided. It has been. The guide passage 745 b is a passage that is inclined downward toward the probability variation entrance opening 502. By this inclination, the game ball that has progressed to the guide passage 745 b can be caused to flow down to the probability variation entrance port 502. Further, the guide passage 745d is a passage that is inclined downward toward the probability variation entrance 504. By this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guide passage 745d can flow down to the probability variation entrance 504.

  In addition, among the joint parts of each passage (guide passages 745a to 745d) and each cover member (cover members 744a and 744b), the upper surface side of each passage gently draws an arc (curves). It has a shape. Thereby, when a game ball passes through each passage, the inner side (the side closer to the sorting rotator 741) can flow down. Therefore, the inner wall portion of each cover member and the game ball can be made difficult to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the impact of the game ball colliding with the inner wall portion of the cover member separates the cover member and the flow path forming portion 743 during the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a magnet 747a and a magnet 747b are provided on the surface of the cover member 744a and the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, respectively. Further, magnets 807a and 807b are provided on the front side and the back side of the sorting rotator 741, respectively. In a state where the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the magnet 747a and the magnet 807a overlap each other in a state where the sorting rotating body 741 is not swung to the right or left (neutral state). Is provided. In addition, the magnet 747b and the magnet 807b are provided at the overlapping positions.

  Here, the magnet 747a and the magnet 807a are installed in directions that repel each other when the sorting rotator 741 is swung and displaced to a neutral state. Similarly, the magnet 747b and the magnet 807b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if vibration is applied to the sorting rotator 741, the magnets 807a and 807b provided on the side surfaces of the sorting rotator 741 and the cover member 744a, Since the magnets 747a and 747b provided on the 744b repel each other, the sorting rotating body 741 can be prevented from rotating beyond the portions of the magnets 747a and 747b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the sorting rotator 741 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the structure of the sorting rotator 741 disposed in the entrance opening sorting unit 740 will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the structure of the sorting rotator 741. FIG. 11A is a front perspective view in a state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, and FIG. 11B is a front perspective view in a state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right. FIG. 11C is a front view of the state in which the sorting rotator 741 does not swing to the right or left (neutral state), and FIG. 11D illustrates that the sorting rotator 741 is also moved to the right. It is a top view in the state (neutral state) which is not shaken to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the sorting rotating body 741 is provided with a substantially fan-shaped partition member 801. By providing the partition member 801, even if vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or the game ball and the cover members 744a and 744b are repelled, the game ball is separated from the flow path in which the game ball has traveled. Can be suppressed.

  Further, on the front side of the partition member 801, a ball repelling portion 802 that rebounds the game ball flowing down the front route to the left in a front view, and a concave shape that receives the game ball flowing down the front route and hinders progress. A ball stopper 804 is provided. Note that the game ball rebounded by the ball repulsion unit 802 (see FIG. 12B) flows down the guide passage 745a provided in the cover member 744a and enters the short time entrance 501 (FIG. 12C). )reference). On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stopper 804, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 804 (see FIG. 14A). Due to this load, the sorting rotator 741 swings rightward when viewed from the front, with the rotator support shafts 806a and 806b as the rotation shaft (see FIG. 14B). As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stopper 804 onto the guide passage 745c and enters the probability variation entrance 503 through the guide passage 745c (see FIG. 14C).

  On the other hand, on the back side of the partition member 801, a ball repelling portion 803 that rebounds the game ball flowing down the back route to the right in a front view and a concave shape that receives the game ball flowing down the back route and hinders progress. A ball stopper 805 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 11C and 11D, the ball repelling portion 803 and the ball stopper 805 have the same shape as the ball repelling portion 802 and the ball stopper 804 described above. That is, the shape is the same when the sorting rotating body 741 is viewed from the front direction and when viewed from the back direction.

  The game ball rebounded by the ball repulsion unit 803 (see FIG. 15B) flows down the guide passage 745d provided in the cover member 744b and enters the probability variation entrance 504 (see FIG. 15C). ). On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stopper 805, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 805 (see FIG. 13A). With this load, the sorting rotator 741 swings leftward as viewed from the front, with the rotator support shafts 806a and 806b serving as the rotation shaft. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stopper 805 onto the guide passage 745b and enters the probability variation entrance port 502 through the guide passage 745b (see FIG. 13C).

  Next, the operation of the game ball flowing down to the sorting rotator 741 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting rotator 741 and the game balls when the game ball flows down the back route with the sorting rotator 741 swinging to the right. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the distribution rotary body 741 and a game ball | bowl in case the game ball | bowl flows down the near route in the state which 741 swung to the right side. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the operation of the sorting rotator 741 and the game balls when the game balls flow down the back route with the sorting rotator 741 swinging to the left. FIG. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the distribution rotation body 741 and a game ball in the case where a game ball flows down the near route in a state where the rotation body 741 swings to the left side.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12, a case where the flow path is set to the front route (see FIG. 8B) and the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right will be described. In the first round of jackpot, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has a flow path set at the front route. The ball enters the route guide hole 742a and flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotator 741 (see FIG. 12A).

  In the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side, the ball repulsion part 802 is located directly below the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion part 802 (FIG. 12 ( b)). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the left direction when viewed from the front, so that the game ball travels along the guide passage 745a and enters the short time entrance 501. In other words, the entrance for the first entry of the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is the short time entrance 501. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and enters the normal symbol time-short state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

  In addition, the ball repulsion unit 802 has a slope with an inclination that rises in the upper right direction in a state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side. By colliding with 802, a force in a direction to rotate the sorting rotating body 741 to the right works. However, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right, there is no room for the sorting rotator 741 to rotate rightward, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 802, The state does not change.

  In the first round of jackpot, the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 741 subsequently travel the same route, so that all the game balls have the short-time entrance 501 without swinging the sorting rotator 741. Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that have initially entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the short time entrance 501 without changing the state of the sorting rotator 741.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C, in the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side, the bottom surface on the right side of the partition portion 801 is in contact with the flow path forming portion 743. The lower part of the ball stopper 803 disposed on the front side and the lower part of the ball repulsion part 803 disposed on the rear side when viewed from the front are not in contact with the guide passage 745c and the guide passage 745d, and a space is generated. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the ball stopper 804 or the lower part of the ball repelling part 803 from repelling the guide path 745c and the guide path 745d due to the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repelling part 802. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sorting rotator 741 that has been shaken to the right side from rotating due to the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball repulsion unit 802 from turning to the left side and switching to the left side. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side, the flow path passes through the lower end of the ball repulsion unit 802 and the center of the flow path where the game ball flows down. The center line O is configured to intersect. That is, since the ball repulsion part 802 is shifted to the right side with respect to the flow path, the game ball that has flowed down the flow path is configured not to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion part 802. Here, since it goes away from the rotation axis of the sorting rotator 741 toward the upper side of the ball repulsion unit 802, the direction in which the game ball collides with the upper side of the ball repulsion unit 802 moves the sorting rotator 741 to the right by the impact of the collision. The force in the direction of turning is increased. When the force to rotate rightward is increased, the force by which the bottom surface of the partition 801 pushes the flow path forming unit 743 is also increased based on the force to rotate rightward. Accordingly, the reaction that the partition 801 receives from the flow path forming unit 743 is also strong, so that the sorting rotator 741 is likely to rebound, and the possibility that the sorting rotator 741 is switched to the left side is increased. For this reason, as in the present embodiment, the game ball is configured not to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion unit 802, thereby suppressing the rebound of the sorting rotator 741 and the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 802. Based on this, the sorting rotating body 741 is prevented from switching to a state where it is swung to the left.

  Next, the state of the back route and the state in which the sorting rotator 741 has swung to the right will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. In this state, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has the flow path set to the back route (see FIG. 8A), so the back flow path 732b. Through the back route guide hole 742b, and flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  In the state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side, the ball stopper 805 is located immediately below the back route guide hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route is received by the ball stop 805 (FIG. 13A )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 805. That is, since a force in a direction to rotate the sorting rotator 741 to the left acts, the sorting rotator 741 pivots to the left and swings to the left (see FIG. 13B).

  Further, when the sorting rotator 741 swings to the left side, the ball stopper 805 that is a part of the sorting rotator also rotates to the left in conjunction with the sorting rotator 741, so the ball stopper 805 is directed downward to the lower left. On the slope. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stopper 805 rolls down from the ball stopper 805 based on the rotation of the ball stopper 805 and tilts, travels along the guide passage 745b, and the probability variation ball opening. Enter 502. In other words, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a first enters becomes the probability changing entrance 502. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol.

  Note that, in the first round of jackpot, the game balls that have subsequently reached the sorting rotator 741 also travel in the back route. As described above, the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 741. Accordingly, since the ball repulsion part 803 is positioned directly below the back route guiding hole 742b (see FIG. 15A), the game ball flowing down the back route collides with the ball repulsion part 803 (FIG. 15). (See (b)). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the right direction when viewed from the front, and thus proceeds along the guide passage 745d (see FIG. 15C) and enters the probability variation entrance 504.

  In other words, the game ball that first entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a is switched to the state in which the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, and enters the probability variation entrance 502. Then, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enter the probability changing ball opening 504 without changing the state of the sorting rotating body 741.

  Further, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stopper 805 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745d is configured to be less than one game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed down the back route guiding hole 742b in a state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right side from proceeding to the guiding path 745d. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stopper 805 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745d, the sorting rotating body 741 flows down in the middle of rotating to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball. The game ball is sandwiched between the ball stopper 805 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the back route guide hole 742b, and the distribution rotating body 741 can be prevented from operating to the right side or the left side. be able to.

  Next, the case of the front route and the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left will be described with reference to FIGS. In this state, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has the flow path set at the front route, and therefore the front route guide hole 742a through the front side flow channel 732a. And then flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  In the state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, the ball stopper 804 is located immediately below the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route is received by the ball stopper 804 (FIG. 14 (a )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stopper 804. That is, since a force is applied to rotate the sorting rotator 741 to the right, the sorting rotator 741 pivots to the right and swings to the right (see FIG. 14B).

  Further, when the sorting rotator 741 swings to the right side, the ball stopper 804 that is a part of the sorting rotator 741 also rotates in the right direction in conjunction with the sorting rotator 741 and has a slope that faces downward in the lower right direction. Is made. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stopper 804 rolls off from the ball stopper 804 based on the rotation of the ball stopper 804, travels along the guide passage 745 c, and enters the probable entrance ball 503. Enter the ball. That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a first enters becomes the probability changing entrance 503. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol.

  It should be noted that game balls that have reached the sorting rotating body 741 in the same round of the jackpot proceed in the same way as before. As described above, based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the sorting rotator 741, the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right. Therefore, the ball repulsion part 802 is positioned directly below the front route guide hole 742a (see FIG. 12A), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion part 802 (FIG. 12B). )reference). As a result, the game ball bounces back in the left direction when viewed from the front, and thus proceeds along the guide passage 745a (see FIG. 12C) and enters the short time entrance 501.

  In other words, the game ball that first entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a is switched to the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right, and enters the probability variation entrance 503. Then, the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enter the short-time entering hole 501 without changing the state of the sorting rotator 741.

  In addition, when the game state after the jackpot is set based on the type of the entrance where the game ball first entered in the first round of the jackpot, the setting is maintained for the jackpot. Yes. In other words, the game state setting after the jackpot is overwritten is not overwritten. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot ends is special based on the fact that the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in the first ball enters the probability changing entrance 503. If it is set to the high probability state of the symbol, even if a game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the short-time entrance 501, The gaming state after the end of the jackpot will not be a low probability state of a special symbol.

  Further, in a state where the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stopper 804 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745a is configured to be less than one game ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a from proceeding to the guide passage 745a. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stopper 804 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745a, the sorting rotating body 741 flows down on the way to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball. The game ball is caught between the ball stopper 804 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the front route guide hole 742a, and the distribution rotating body 741 can be prevented from operating on the right side and the left side. be able to.

  Next, a case where the flow path is set to the back route and the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left will be described with reference to FIG. The game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enters the back route guide hole 742b via the back side flow channel 732b because the flow channel is set to the back route. Sphere and flow down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotator 741 (see FIG. 15A).

  In the state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, the ball repulsion unit 803 is positioned directly below the back route guiding hole 742b, and the game ball flowing down the back route collides with the ball repulsion unit 803 (FIG. 15 ( b)). As a result, the game ball is bounced back in the right direction when viewed from the front, and thus proceeds along the guide passage 745d and enters the probability variation entrance 504. That is, the entrance into which the game ball that entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140 a first enters becomes the probability variation entrance 504. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a high probability state with a special symbol.

  In addition, in a state where the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left side, the ball repulsion unit 803 has a slope with an inclination that rises in the upper left direction, so that a game ball that has fallen from vertically above is a ball repulsion unit. By colliding with 803, a force in a direction to rotate the sorting rotator 741 to the left works. However, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, there is no room for the sorting rotator 741 to rotate leftward, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion unit 803, the sorting rotator 741 The state does not change.

  In the same round of the jackpot, the game balls that have reached the sorting rotator 741 subsequently travel in the back route in the same manner. Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that have initially entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the probability changing entrance 504 without changing the state of the sorting rotator 741.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, based on the entrance to which the game ball first entered in the first round (one of the short-time entrance 501 and the probable entrance 501 to 504). It is configured to determine whether a special symbol has a high probability state or a special symbol has a low probability state after the jackpot is finished, and a plurality of game balls are configured to be able to proceed to the sorting rotator 741. Yes.

  Next, how the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching valve 731 operate in the first round of jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a time chart showing the operation of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching valve 731 in the first round. FIG. 16A shows the control when the game ball flows down to the front route (when the winning jackpot is the big hit B), and FIG. 16B causes the game ball to flow down to the back route. The control of the case (when the winning jackpot is the jackpot A) is shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 16A, an operation in the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the front route will be described. In FIG. 16 (a), the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (open or closed). The correspondence is shown. On the other hand, the lower diagram in FIG. 16A shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open channel (front channel 732a or back channel 732b). Is shown.

  When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the front route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened immediately after the start of the first round. This open state is a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and immediately closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Then, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed until 7 seconds elapse from the start of the first round. On the other hand, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened from the lapse of 7 seconds until the end of one round. Then, at the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. The first round of jackpot continues until a predetermined time elapses (until 30 seconds elapses or until ten balls are awarded to the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a).

  On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side of the second variable winning device 140 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is blocked until 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. A state in which the back channel 732b is opened). After 6.5 seconds, the flow path solenoid valve 265 tilts the flow path switching valve 731 toward the back side of the variable winning device 140 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is opened and the back side flow path is opened). 732b is blocked). After the flow path switching valve 731 is completely switched to the back side, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side even after the first round is completed.

  In a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a short period (for example, 0. 0) immediately after the first round is started. 2 seconds), and it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Therefore, the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a basically after 7 seconds or more have passed since the start of the first round, and the flow path switching valve 731 is moved to the back side. After switching to the tilted state (the state where the near-side flow path 732a is opened), when winning the big hit B, it entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a The game ball can flow down to the near-side channel 732a (see FIG. 16A). Accordingly, the game ball can enter the front route guide hole 742a and flow down the channel on the front side (front route) of the sorting rotating body 741.

  Here, the reason that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a short period of time immediately after the first round is started is the jackpot A and the jackpot B at the start of the first round This is because the operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is made common. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16B, but when the big hit A is won, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. In accordance with the operation at the time of jackpot A, in the case of jackpot B, the second specific prize opening (second big opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the jackpot type based on the state of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a when the first round starts. Therefore, it is possible to keep the feeling of expectation for winning the jackpot A that is advantageous to the player for a longer time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, an operation in the case where the game ball is caused to flow down to the back route will be described. In FIG. 16 (b), the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state of the second winning prize opening (second large opening) 140a (closed or opened). The correspondence is shown. On the other hand, the lower diagram in FIG. 16 (b) shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open channel (front channel 732a or back channel 732b). Is shown.

  When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the back route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened until 5 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. On the other hand, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed during the period from the lapse of 5 seconds to the end of the first round. This closed state is maintained until the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the operation of the flow path switching valve 731 is exactly the same as the operation described in FIG. That is, it is set in a state of being tilted forward until 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (6.5 seconds after the start of the first round), and thereafter It can be switched to the state tilted to the back side. Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open, the flow path switching member 734 is always tilted to the near side, so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) ) The game ball that has entered the ball 140a can flow down to the back channel 732b (see FIG. 16B). Accordingly, the game ball can enter the back route guide hole 742b and can advance to the flow path (back route) on the back side of the sorting rotating body 741.

  In addition, the arrangement of the flow path switching valve 731 is switched after a lapse of 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Mouth) This is to make sure that all the game balls that have entered the ball 140a advance to the back route. That is, even if a game ball enters immediately before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept in the position on the near side for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, it can suppress that the setting (direction to which it inclines) of the flow-path switching valve 731 switches in the state in which the game ball remained in the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 140.

  As described above, the operations of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching valve 731 in the first round of the jackpot have been described in detail, but these are states other than the first round Then, each of the initial states is set. The initial state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a indicates a closed state. Further, the initial state of the flow path switching valve 731 is a state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side (that is, a state where the front side flow path 732a is opened and the back side flow path 732b is shielded). . For this reason, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed at the end of the first round, and is kept closed until the first round of the next jackpot is started. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is set regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. Set to closed.

  On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side until the next big hit after the end of one round. Then, it is switched to a state of being tilted to the near side after the jackpot stop symbol is fixedly displayed until the first round starts, and after the first round starts, the above-described operation is performed. In addition, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to the state tilted to the near side regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off.

  In addition, the switching timing of the flow path and the opening and closing timings of the second specific prize winning opening (second large opening) 140a for each jackpot type are not limited to this embodiment. For example, in the big hit B, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is not opened immediately after the start of the first round, and the second specific prize opening (second The two large opening openings 140a may be closed. As a result, the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened only during the period in which the near-side channel 732a is open, so that the game ball is reliably advanced to the near-side channel 732a. Can do.

  Also, for example, at the jackpot B, the timing at which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened is 27 seconds after the start of the big hit, and the game ball is in the second specific winning slot (second large opening). Mouth) It may be configured to make it difficult to enter the ball 140a. Similarly, in the jackpot B, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open is 3 seconds from the start of the first round, and the game ball is in the second specific winning opening (second large opening). You may comprise so that it may become difficult to enter into the opening | mouth 140a. As a result, when a game ball is launched into the lottery device 700 in the first round, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension, so that the jackpot is simply an operation for obtaining the ball. Can be suppressed. In each jackpot, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, the game balls can be easily advanced into the lottery apparatus 700 in the first round, so that the lottery by the lottery apparatus 700 can be easily received. Therefore, the first round can be played while giving the player a sense of security.

  In the present embodiment, one round is continued until 30 seconds elapse or until ten game balls are won in the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until 12 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won in the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. With this configuration, in the case of a big hit B, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened 7 seconds after the start of the first round, and the maximum 12 seconds after the start of the first round. 2 The specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. That is, since the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is the same as when winning the jackpot A. 140a can be opened. Therefore, the winning ball obtained in one round can be made equal for jackpot A and jackpot B. Further, in the jackpot A, when 5 seconds elapse before 10 game balls are won in the first round, the period until the end of the first round can be shortened. In other words, even if the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed and the player launches a game ball, the period in which the prize ball cannot be obtained can be shortened, so that the player becomes bored. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first round of jackpot, the flow path switching valve 731 starts from a state tilted to the near side, but starts from a state tilted to the far side, and the near side in the middle of the first round You may comprise so that it may switch to the state inclined to. Since the state of the flow path switching valve 731 before the big hit starts is a state tilted to the back side (that is, a state where the game ball can pass the front route), if configured in this way, There is no need to tilt the path switching valve 731 forward. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is fully inclined to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the big hit B. Can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side is the initial state, but the state where the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side may be the initial state. Thereby, since the setting at the start of the first round matches the initial state, it is not necessary to switch the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 before the first round of jackpot. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is fully tilted to the back side, and the game ball advances to the front flow path 732a despite the big hit A. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data described above, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. The change pattern selection table 202d, the second large opening switching table 202e, and the flow path switching table 202f are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per-random number counter C1, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 17B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”. Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit B is associated and defined. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 17C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 17C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see FIG. 17C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal symbol is referred to with reference to the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the second entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c. It is determined whether or not it is a win.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  The second large opening opening switching table 202e is a table that is referred to for opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a during one round of jackpot. The state of the (2 large opening) 140a is defined in association with the value of the time counter 203k that counts the elapsed time from the start of one round (see FIG. 19A). Specifically, in the case of jackpot B, the value of the time counter 203k is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 7 seconds, and is defined as a state in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is defined as being opened after 7 seconds. If more than 7 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the front route (see FIG. 16A), so the second specific winning opening (second The game ball that has entered the large open mouth 140a flows down the front route.

  In the case of big hit A, the value of the time counter 223k is defined as a state in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened at a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 5 seconds, and after 5 seconds. Is defined as a state in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened (see FIG. 19A). During the 5 seconds from the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game balls flow is set to the back route (see FIG. 16B), so the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a The game ball that entered the ball flows down the back route.

  The flow path switching table 202g has a flow path for flowing down the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a during the big round and the interval period after the end of the first round. It is a table that is referred to for switching, and the state of the flow path is defined in association with the value of the time counter 203k.

  Specifically, the flow path is defined as the back route until 6.5 seconds elapse from the start of one round (see FIG. 19B). As described above, in the case of jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed 5 seconds after the start of the first round, so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a A margin of 1.5 seconds is provided after the channel is closed until the flow path is switched. Thereby, even if a game ball enters immediately before closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, it is possible to switch the flow path after reliably proceeding to the back route.

  Further, after 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round, it is defined that the flow path becomes the front route until the first round is completed (see FIG. 19B). As described above, the setting of the flow path is controlled so as to be the front route other than the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, even after the first round is completed, the flow path is maintained in the state of the front route. The state of this front route continues until the next jackpot is won and switched to the back route.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 47). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 47).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number counter C1. When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the random number per table 202a matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per-random number table 202a (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and the first per-random number table 202a (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability time. Stored in In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are It is stored in the first per random number table 202a for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability and the random hit that is stored in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are big hits are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the timing for acquiring the random value is analyzed and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back off” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth off” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 18 (a)).

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various types of “normal out”, “out of short reach”, “out of long reach”, and “out of super reach” are defined as variation patterns for out. “Normal deviation” is a deviation fluctuation that does not cause reach, and “Look short reach” is a fluctuation type that has a relatively short fluctuation period among deviation fluctuations that cause reach. “Outgoing long reach” is a type of fluctuation that has a longer fluctuation period than “outgoing short reach” among outlier fluctuations that cause reach. Further, “outgoing super reach” is a fluctuation type having the longest fluctuation period among outlier fluctuations in which reach occurs.

  Further, in the variation pattern table 202d, various types of “hit short reach”, “hit long reach”, and “hit super reach” are defined as variation patterns for big hits. “Short Short Reach” is a type of fluctuation with a relatively short fluctuation period among hit fluctuations, and “Per Long Reach” has a longer fluctuation period than “Short Short Reach” among hit fluctuations. It is a variation type. Further, “hit super reach” is a variation type having the longest variation period. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, a common fluctuation pattern type may be defined for a win case and a miss case. Specifically, “shared short reach”, “shared long reach”, “shared super reach”, etc., which are selected in both cases of losing and winning, may be defined. Further, a “premium reach” or the like that can be selected only at jackpot A that is advantageous to the player may be defined. Thereby, since not only the result of the variation pattern effect but also the aspect of the variation pattern effect can be noted, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C). In addition, the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a probability that the normal symbol is hit from the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c for low probability. In this way, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the normal symbol jackpot is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) for high probability. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the normal symbol jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 47).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 20, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 47), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 42) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 41) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Here, various counters and various flags provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. , Hour / medium counter 203f, jackpot flag 203g, changing flag 203h, counter buffer 203i, rotating body flag 203j, time counter 203k, entrance waiting flag 203l, large opening mouth flag 203m, flow The road flag 203n, the payout flag 203o, the entrance type storage area 203p, the probability variation setting flag 203q, and the out ball counter 203r are provided.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 31).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 31 and S405 in FIG. 33). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the number of held balls (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball through the second entrance 67. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time the game ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the normal value is 1 Addition is performed (see S604 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S505 in FIG. 34).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Not performed (S603 in FIG. 35: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state of a special symbol). Indicates that The probability variation flag 203e is set to an initial value of OFF, and when a game ball enters any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 in the lottery performed by the lottery device 300 based on the special symbol jackpot Then, it is turned on based on the end of the jackpot (S2103 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off based on the end of the jackpot when a game ball enters the short time entrance 501 in the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 (S2104 in FIG. 50).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to. If the state is ON, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. If 203e is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the low probability first random number table 202a.

  The time-shortage counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-short state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. Indicates that there is. In this case, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and when the game ball wins the short / short winning port 501 in the lottery performed by the lottery device 300 based on the special symbol jackpot, Is set to a specific value (for example, 50). Further, even when no ball is entered in the first round of jackpot, a specific value (for example, 50) is set based on the end of the jackpot (see S2104 in FIG. 50). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203f becomes 0 (S216 in FIG. 31).

  When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol of the normal symbol is based on the second random number table 202c for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table 202c for the low probability (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 34).

  The jackpot flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit. If the jackpot flag 203g is on, it indicates that the jackpot is being set. The jackpot medium flag 203g is set to ON when setting the jackpot start (see S214 in FIG. 31), and is set to OFF when setting the jackpot end (see S2105 in FIG. 50). As will be described in detail later, based on the jackpot / medium flag 203g, a signal (jackpot / medium signal) indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot is output to an external device (such as the hall computer 262). The An external device such as the hall computer 262 can grasp the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10 based on the jackpot signal, and can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fraudulent.

  The changing flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is changing. If the changing flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol is changing. The changing flag 203h is set to ON based on setting the start of changing the special symbol (see S312 in FIG. 32), and is OFF based on setting the symbol stop when the symbol changing time has elapsed. It is set (see S211 in FIG. 31). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing with respect to the hall computer 262 based on the changing flag 203h when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off. Is output so as to output a signal (symbol fluctuation signal). The hall computer 262 compares the state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing) when the power supply was interrupted last time with the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to discriminate whether or not there is fraud.

  The counter buffer 203i is a storage area for storing various counter values such as the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2. Based on the various counter values stored in the counter buffer 203i, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is a big hit, a jackpot type is determined, and the like.

  The rotator flag 203j is a flag indicating the direction of the sorting rotator 741 disposed in the lottery device 700. When the position of the sorting rotator 741 is shifted before and after the power is turned on, the sorting rotator is moved. 741 is used to return the arrangement of 741 to the state before powering off. If this rotator flag 203j is on, it indicates that the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left (see FIG. 15), and if it is off, the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right (see FIG. 15). 12). This rotating body flag 203j is switched in conjunction with the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 741 by the position detection sensor 263, and when the position detecting sensor 263 detects that the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left side. The rotating body flag is turned on, and is turned off when it is detected that the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the right.

  The time counter 203k is a counter that measures the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot round and the elapsed time from the start of the interval period. Based on the time counted by the time counter 203k, the opening / closing of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is controlled (see S2203 in FIG. 51), or the route (the front route, The switching of the back route is controlled (see S2303 in FIG. 52).

  The entrance waiting flag 203l is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has entered any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504) during the big hit. This entry waiting flag 203l is set to ON when setting the jackpot start (see S214 in FIG. 31), and one of the entrances (the hourly entry entrance 501 and the probability change entrance entrances 502 to 504). When it is detected that a game ball has entered the ball, it is set off (see S2411 and S2417 in FIG. 53). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters one of the entrances with the entrance standby flag 203l set to ON, it corresponds to the entrance entrance that entered the ball. It is configured to shift to the state after the jackpot ends.

  The large open mouth flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is in an open state, and when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. It is set to ON (see S2208 in FIG. 51), and is set to OFF when the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (see S2212 in FIG. 51).

  The flow path flag 203n is a flag that indicates whether a game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can pass the front route or the back route, It is set to ON (see S2310 in FIG. 52) and can pass through the back route (that is, the flow path) if it can pass through the front route (that is, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side). If the switching valve 731 is tilted to the near side), it is set to off (see S2307 in FIG. 52).

  The payout flag 203o is a flag that indicates whether or not a game ball has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and a winning ball is being paid out. The payout flag 203o is set to ON after setting the state after the end of jackpot (see S2411 and S2417 in FIG. 53), and set to OFF at the start of jackpot (see S1904 in FIG. 48).

  The entrance type storage area 203p is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of entrance that the ball entered first in the first round of jackpot. Based on the information stored in the entrance type storage area 203p, it is determined whether or not there is an illegal act when the power is turned on. Specifically, when it is determined that the information stored in the entrance type storage area 203p indicates the short-time entrance 501 but the special symbol is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, The occurrence of an abnormality is notified because there is a possibility that the state of special symbol is shifted from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol due to some fraud during the power-off state (see FIG. 43). (See S1405). Thereby, it is possible to prevent unexpected damage from occurring in the hall due to fraud. When the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, information stored in the entrance type storage area 203p is information indicating the short-time entrance 501. When the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol regardless of the state before the power is cut off, and therefore information indicating the short time entrance 501 is stored. By storing in the area 203p, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of fraud even before winning the jackpot.

  The probability variation setting flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has entered one of the probability variation entrance holes 502 to 504 in the first round of jackpot. The probability variation setting flag 203q is set to ON when the game ball enters any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 in the first round of jackpot (see S2407 in FIG. 53). When a ball is entered (see S2416 in FIG. 53), and off based on the end of jackpot (see S2105 in FIG. 50). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the state of the probability variation setting flag 203q, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON when the big hit ends (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 50). When a game ball enters the probability variation entrance balls 502 to 504, the probability variation setting flag 203q is set to ON, and the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON by referring to the value of the probability variation setting flag 203q at the end of the big hit. Thus, the probability variation flag 203e can be set at the same timing for each big hit. That is, the timing for shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol or the short time state of the normal symbol can be matched with each big hit.

  The out ball counter 203r is a counter that counts the game balls that have entered the out port 66. Based on the value of the out sphere counter 203r, a signal (out sphere detection signal) for notifying the number of out spheres is output to an external device such as the hall computer 262. In the present embodiment, the out sphere detection signal is output every time the count value of the out sphere counter 203r is counted 10. As a result, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can easily grasp the number of out balls of the pachinko machine 10 simply by adding 10 to the number of out balls each time an out ball detection signal is received.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc., and a flow path switching valve 731 in the lottery device 700 to drive a game ball. The flow path solenoid 265 for switching the flow path and the MPU 201 transmit various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  In addition, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115, and each entrance in the lottery device 700. A winning sensor 420 that detects the entry of a game ball, a position detection sensor 263 that detects a state of the sorting rotator 741 in the lottery device 700 (whether it is shaken to the right or left), and sort rotation A rotation motor 264 for correcting the orientation of the body 741 is connected, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from various switches 208, a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, and a winning sensor 420. Various processes are executed based on the incoming signal, the detection signal of the position detection sensor 263, and the like.

  Further, an external output terminal plate 261 is connected to the input / output port 205. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, information corresponding to the game situation such as information indicating the start winning prize and information indicating the number of prize balls is sent to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the external output terminal board 261. It is configured to allow output. The externally output data is received by the hall computer 262 electrically connected to the external output terminal board 261. The hall computer 262 is configured such that information output from each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall can be totaled individually. More specifically, a data storage area corresponding to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall is provided in the hard disk 273 (see FIG. 29A) of the hall computer 262, and the external output terminal board 261 is provided. Every time data is received, the contents of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the data are updated. Based on the contents stored in this data storage area, the game history of each pachinko machine 10 (the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations for each day, the entrance of the lottery device 700 into which a game ball entered at each jackpot, etc.), It is configured to be able to grasp the ball rate, operating rate, and the presence or absence of fraud and abnormalities.

  The external output terminal plate 261 has 14 output channels CN1 to CN14. Each of these 14 channels is configured to be able to output either an H output signal (for example, 5 volt output) or an L output signal (for example, 0 volt output). Each of these channels is provided with a ground pin in addition to a pin for outputting game information such as a game state and a game situation. That is, each channel is a set of two pins. The ground pin is connected to a common ground of the external output terminal board 261, and is configured to always output 0 volts. The hall computer 262 compares the 0 volt reference voltage output from the ground pin with the voltage output from the pin for outputting information, so that the state of the pin for outputting information is H output. It is possible to easily determine whether the current state is the L output state or the L output state. Note that it is not always necessary to provide a ground pin for each channel. For example, a dedicated channel for outputting a reference voltage of 0 volts may be provided. Thereby, since the number of pins of each channel can be reduced by one, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of harnesses and the number of connectors.

  Next, details of signals output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (from the start of the pachinko machine 10 is completed until the power-off is detected), and when the power-up is started, Alternatively, the signal output to the outside via the external output terminal plate 261 differs depending on the detection of the power interruption. In the normal game state, the hall computer 262 can grasp the game data of each pachinko machine 10 by externally outputting information according to the game situation (out ball situation, prize ball payout situation, etc.) It is configured. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on, the gaming state (whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or whether the symbol is changing) is changed. The information shown can be output from the external output terminal board 261. As a result, the hall computer 262 uses the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the gaming state output from the external output terminal board 261 at the time of start-up upon power-on and the information indicating the gaming state that was notified when the power was previously turned off. 10 is configured so as to be able to determine the presence or absence of fraudulent acts with respect to 10. In other words, if the gaming state determined based on the information notified at the previous power-off is different from the gaming state determined based on the information notified at the current start-up, the power is cut off. It is possible to determine that there is a possibility that the gaming state has been changed by some kind of fraud while being in the state, and to notify the abnormality. Note that when the game state is different, for example, the information indicating the low probability state of the special symbol is notified from the external output terminal board 261 when the power is cut off, but the high probability state of the special symbol at the next power-on. This is a case where information indicating is received.

  First, referring to FIG. 22, each channel (each output pin) provided on the external output terminal board 261 in a normal gaming state (from the start of the pachinko machine 10 until the power-off is detected). The types of signals output from will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with 14 channels CN1 to CN14, and a signal corresponding to the game situation is output from each channel. Specifically, the CN 1 outputs a signal (power on signal) indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. This power-on signal indicates that the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 when the output is H (output is high), and the power is turned off when the output is L (output is low). It shows that. The hall computer 262 can determine whether or not each pachinko machine 10 is powered on based on whether the power-on signal is in the H output state or the L output state.

  The CN2 of the external output terminal plate 261 outputs an out ball detection signal whose output becomes H (high output) every time 10 game balls have entered the out port 66. This out sphere detection signal is set to the L output state after being kept in the H output state for 0.2 seconds every time 10 out spheres are detected (see S806 in FIG. 37). The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of out balls based on the out ball detection signal. The hall computer 262 can grasp the number of out balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on the out ball detection signal.

  From the CN3 of the external output terminal plate 261, a first large opening operation signal that is a signal indicating whether or not the state of the first specific prize opening (first large opening) 65a is in an open state is output. This first large opening operation signal is set to the H output state while the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set to the open state (see S2005 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, while the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set to the closed state, the L output state is set (see S1912 in FIG. 48). The hall computer 262 monitors the state of the first specific prize opening (first large opening) 65a based on the first large opening operation signal, and determines whether there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10. In other words, when the first large opening operation signal is H output even though the jackpot is not being hit, there is a possibility that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set to the open state due to fraud. Therefore, the abnormality of the hall computer 262 can be notified to the operator.

  From the CN4 of the external output terminal board 261, a second large opening operation signal that is a signal indicating whether or not the state of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is an open state is output. This second large opening operation signal is set to the H output state while the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the open state (see S2207 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set in the closed state, the L output state is set (see S2211 in FIG. 51). The hall computer 262 monitors the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a based on the second large opening operation signal, and determines whether there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10. That is, when the second large opening operation signal is H output even though the jackpot is not being hit, there is a possibility that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the open state due to an illegal act. Therefore, the abnormality of the hall computer 262 can be notified to the operator.

  From CN5 of the external output terminal plate 261, a start winning signal that is a signal indicating that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 is output. The start winning signal is set to H every time a game ball enters the first entrance 64 (see S903 in FIG. 38). Further, the H output is configured to continue for 0.2 seconds. The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the start winning of each pachinko machine 10 based on the start winning signal.

  The CN6 of the external output terminal plate 261 outputs a symbol stop signal indicating that the special symbol variation has stopped. This symbol stop signal is set to the H output state for 1 second based on the fact that the variation of the special symbol stops (see S212 in FIG. 31). The hall computer 262 can grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbol of each pachinko machine 10 based on the symbol stop signal.

  A through-gate passing signal indicating that a game ball has won the second entrance 67 is output from CN 7 of the external output terminal plate 261. The output of this through gate passing signal is set to H every time a game ball enters the second entrance 67 (see S1003 in FIG. 39). Further, the H output is configured to continue for 0.2 seconds. The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of winnings of the normal symbol of each pachinko machine 10 based on the through gate passing signal.

  A CN 8 on the external output terminal board 261 outputs a winning detection signal indicating that ten winning balls have to be paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes. This winning detection signal is configured such that the H output continues for 0.2 seconds every time the number of winning balls to be paid out becomes ten. The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of winning balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on the winning detection signal.

  From the CN 9 of the external output terminal board 261, a payout signal indicating that the number of prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 is 10 is output. This payout signal is configured such that the H output continues for 0.2 seconds every time the number of prize balls paid out reaches 10 (see S2906 in FIG. 58). The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls paid out from each pachinko machine 10 based on this payout signal. Thereby, the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 and the sales of the hall can be calculated.

  From the CN 10 of the external output terminal plate 261, an inner frame opening signal indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened is output. The output of the inner frame opening signal is set to H while the inner frame 12 is open, and the output is set to L while the inner frame 12 is closed. Since the hall computer 262 can grasp whether or not the inner frame 12 of each pachinko machine 10 is opened by an unauthorized player based on the inner frame release signal, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  From the CN 11 of the external output terminal board 261, a door opening signal indicating whether or not the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened is output. The output of the door opening signal is set to H while the front frame 14 is open, and the output is set to L while the front frame 14 is closed. The hall computer 262 can grasp whether or not the front frame 14 of each pachinko machine 10 is opened by an unauthorized player based on the door opening signal.

  A jackpot signal indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state is output from the CN 12 of the external output terminal board 261. The output of the jackpot signal is set to H during the jackpot of the special symbol, and the output is set to L in a state other than the jackpot. The hall computer 262 can determine the number of jackpots of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of fraud based on this jackpot signal. Specifically, when this jackpot signal is set to the H output state, the hall computer 262 adds 1 to the jackpot number of the pachinko machine 10 so that the jackpot number can be grasped in real time. Has been. Based on this number of jackpots, if an abnormal number of jackpots has occurred, it is determined that there is a possibility of an abnormality or an illegal act, and the abnormality can be notified.

  If the power is turned off while the jackpot signal (CN12) is set to the H output state and the power is turned on again, the power is turned off (the L output state). The hit big hit signal (CN12) is again in the H output state. In this case, if the hall computer 262 adds the number of jackpots, the actual number of jackpots will deviate from the number of jackpots recognized by the hall computer 262. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to output information indicating the gaming state when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). Based on the information indicating the gaming state, when information indicating that the jackpot is being hit when the power is turned on is output to the hall computer 262, even if the CN 12 is subsequently set to the H output state, the hall computer It can be determined that 262 is a jackpot state that continues before the power is shut off. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can accurately grasp the number of jackpots.

  From the CN 13 of the external output terminal plate 261, a rotating body state signal indicating whether or not the state of the sorting rotating body 741 has been swung to the right is output. The output of the rotating body state signal is set to H for 0.2 seconds when the direction of the sorting rotating body 741 is right, and the output is set to L when the direction is left. The hall computer 262 can determine the presence / absence of an illegal act on the sorting rotator 741 of each pachinko machine 10 based on the rotator state signal. In other words, if the orientation of the sorting rotator 741 is switched to the left, which is advantageous to the player, even though it is not a big hit, it is possible that an illegal act has been performed, so that an abnormality is reported. It is configured.

  An abnormality detection signal indicating whether an abnormality has been detected for the pachinko machine 10 is output from the CN 14 of the external output terminal plate 261. This abnormality detection signal has its output set to H when various abnormalities are detected in the pachinko machine 10, and its output is set to L during normal operation. The hall computer 262 can determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in each pachinko machine 10 based on the abnormality detection signal.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the signals corresponding to the game situation are output from each of the 14 channels CN1 to CN14 of the external output terminal board 261, so that the pachinko machine 10 is provided outside the pachinko machine 10. The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the game situation. The hall computer 262 grasps the game situation based on various signals output from each pachinko machine 10, grasps the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10, and determines the presence / absence of illegal acts on each pachinko machine 10. You can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the types of signals output from the external output terminal plate 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up and when a power interruption is detected will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating the contents of signals output from the respective channels of the external output terminal plate 261. As shown in FIG. 23, when starting up and when the power is turned off, different signals are output to the outside from the eight channels CN1 to CN8 of the external output terminal plate 261. Also, the six channels CN9 to CN14 are not used at startup and when the power is turned off. Note that these CN1 to CN14 use the same channels as those used to output signals according to the game situation during normal times. If the normal channel, the startup channel, and the power-off channel are provided separately, the number of channels increases, which may increase the cost of the external output terminal board 261 itself. In addition, the number of reception channels for the external device such as the hall computer 262 to receive the signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the number of harness cables connecting the external output terminal plate 261 and the external device are increased. As a result, the cost of the external device and harness may be increased. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the normal channel and the channel for startup and power-off are shared, and different signals can be output according to the state. Can be reduced. Therefore, the cost increase of the external terminal board 261, the external device, and the harness can be suppressed.

  From the CN1 of the external output terminal plate 261, a signal (power-on signal) indicating whether or not power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is output as in the normal state. As described above, this power-on signal indicates that the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 when the output is H (output is high), and the power is supplied when the output is L (output is low). Indicates that it has been refused.

  From the CN2 of the external output terminal board 261, a special game state signal indicating whether or not a big hit is being output is output. This special game state signal is set to H output when it is determined that the jackpot state is in effect at the time of start-up or power-off (see S1602 in FIG. 45). Set to state. Further, the state of the H output set when it is determined that the jackpot is being continued continues for 0.1 second. That is, a signal having an output period shorter than 0.2 seconds which is an output period of a signal (out sphere detection signal) output from CN2 at normal time is output. The hall computer 262 can identify whether the signal output from the CN 2 is an out-ball detection signal or a special gaming state signal based on the difference in the output period.

  CN3 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a probability changing signal indicating whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (in the probability changing state). This probability variation signal is set to H output (see S1604 in FIG. 45) when it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (during probability variation state) at start-up or power-off. When it is determined that the state is a low probability state, the output is set to L output. Further, the state of the H output that is set when it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state continues for 0.1 second, like the special gaming state signal. Note that the first large opening operation signal output from the CN 3 at the normal time is a signal that is set to the H output state when the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened as described above. The period when the output is H is surely longer than the probability variation signal. When the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, the ball is opened until 10 balls enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or 30 seconds elapse. Is maintained. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can identify whether the output from the CN 3 is the first large opening operation signal or the probability variation signal based on the difference in the H output period.

  The CN4 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a time reduction signal indicating whether or not the normal symbol is in a time reduction state. This short time signal is set to H output when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short state at the time of start-up or power-off (see S1605 in FIG. 45), and the normal symbol is in the normal state. When determined, the output is set to L output. Further, the state of the H output that is set when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state continues for 0.1 second. Note that the second large opening operation signal output from the CN 4 at the normal time is a signal that is set to the H output state when the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened as described above. The period when the output is H is surely longer than the probability variation signal. When the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a is opened, the ball is opened until ten balls have won the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a or 30 seconds have passed. Is maintained. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can identify whether the signal output from the CN 4 is the second large opening operation signal or the time reduction signal based on the difference in the H output period.

  From CN5 of the external output terminal plate 261, a symbol variation signal indicating whether or not the special symbol is varying is output. This symbol fluctuation signal is set to H output when it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating at startup or when the power is turned off (see S1608 in FIG. 45), and is in a symbol stop state, a demo state, or the like. Is determined to be L output. The H output state continues for 0.1 second. Note that the start winning signal output from the CN 5 at the normal time is a signal set in the H output state for 0.2 seconds as described above, and the output period is longer than the symbol variation signal. For this reason, the hall computer 262 can identify whether the output from the CN 5 is the start winning signal or the symbol variation signal based on the difference in the H output period.

  From the CN 6 of the external output terminal plate 261, a rotating body signal indicating whether or not the state of the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left is output. This rotator signal is set to H output when it is determined that the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left at the time of start-up or power-off (see S1610 in FIG. 45). This H output state continues for 0.1 second. Note that the symbol stop signal output from the CN 6 at normal time is a signal that is set to the H output state for 1 second when the symbol stop is detected as described above, and the output period is longer than that of the rotating body signal. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can identify whether the signal output from the CN 6 is a symbol stop signal or a rotator signal based on the difference in the H output period.

  From the CN7 of the external output terminal board 261, a RAM initialization signal indicating whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 has been pressed at the time of startup upon power-on is output. This RAM initialization signal is set to the H output state for 0.1 second when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been pressed at the time of start-up upon power-on (see S1501 in FIG. 44). When the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the contents of the RAM 203 are initialized, so there is no point in comparing the previous gaming state when the power is turned off with the gaming state when the power is turned on. . Therefore. By outputting the RAM initialization signal, it is possible to prevent the hall computer 262 from executing unnecessary processing. In addition, although the hall clerk intentionally depresses the RAM erasure switch 122 (that is, no fraud has been performed), the gaming state at the previous power-off and the game after the RAM 203 is initialized. Since the state is different, it is possible to prevent the abnormality from being notified by the hall computer 262. This RAM initialization signal is a signal that is set to H output only at the time of startup by turning on the power, and is fixed to L output when the power is turned off.

  From the CN 8 of the external output terminal board 261, a notification end signal indicating whether or not to end the notification of the gaming state that is executed when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off is output. The output of this notification end signal is set to H for 0.1 seconds when the notification of the gaming state is ended. The hall computer 262 receives the notification end signal and determines that the gaming state notification has ended. Note that the winning detection signal output from the CN 8 during normal operation is a signal that is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds every time 10 winning balls are detected, and is output from the notification end signal. The period becomes longer. For this reason, the hall computer 262 can identify whether the winning detection signal or the notification end signal is output from the CN 6 based on the difference in the H output period.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the output period of the signal output from each channel can be changed according to the type of the signal to be output. In addition, when a signal corresponding to the gaming state is output, a notification end signal is output. Thus, an external device (such as the hall computer 262) that has received the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 accurately grasps the type of the output signal and executes processing according to information included in the signal. be able to.

  Next, examples of actual signals output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 24A shows an example of a power-on signal output from CN1. As shown in FIG. 24A, the power-on signal is set to the L output state during the power-off state. The output rises to H by detecting power-on (power-on). The state of the H output continues until the next power-off occurs in the pachinko machine 10, and the output of the power-on signal falls to the L state based on the detection of the power-off. This L output state continues until the next time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of an out-ball detection signal output from CN2 and a winning detection signal output from CN8. As shown in the figure, there are 10 out-balls or 10 winning balls. Then, the output of the out ball detection signal or the winning detection signal is set to H. This H output state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the output falls to L. Also, as shown on the left side of FIG. 24 (b), if it is detected again that the number of out balls or prize balls has become 10 in 0.2 seconds set to the H output state, 0 is detected from the first detection. • After 2 seconds, the signal is once set to the L output state. This L output state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the H output state is set again. In this way, when 10 balls are detected in succession, the output interval of each H output signal is set to 0.2 seconds, so that the output frequency of the H output signal can be accurately determined with respect to an external device (such as the hall computer 262). It can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate the pitching rate of the pachinko machine 10 and the sales of the hall.

  FIG. 24C shows a first large opening operation signal output from CN3, a second large opening operation signal output from CN4, an inner frame opening signal output from CN10, and a CN11 output. It is the figure which showed the example of the door opening signal. As shown in the figure, when the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the inner frame 12, etc. is detected, the corresponding channel is set to the H output state. This H output state continues until the opened first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the inner frame 12, and the like are closed. When closing is detected, the corresponding channel is set to the L output state.

  FIG. 25A is a diagram illustrating an example of a start winning signal output from CN5 and a through gate passing signal output from CN7. As shown in the figure, when the winning of the game ball to the first entrance or the second entrance is detected, the output of the start winning signal or the through gate passing signal is set to H. This H output state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the output falls to L. Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 25 (a), when a winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 67 is detected in 0.2 seconds set to the H output state, The signal is once set to the L output state 0.2 seconds after the detection. This L output state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the H output state is set again. In this way, when winnings are detected in succession, the output interval of each H output signal is set to 0.2 seconds so that the number of H output signals output can be accurately grasped with respect to an external device (such as the hall computer 262). Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10, the presence or absence of abnormality, and the like.

  FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating an example of the symbol stop signal output from the CN 6. As shown in the figure, until the special symbol fluctuation stops, CN6 is set to the L output state, and when it is detected that the special symbol fluctuation has stopped, CN6 is set to the H output state. This H output state continues for 1 second, and after 1 second has elapsed, it is set to the L output state again. Note that the output period of the symbol stop signal is set longer than the output periods of the other signals because a situation in which the symbol stop occurs in a short period cannot occur. In other words, the special symbol variation period is set to a period of several seconds to several tens of seconds. It will take time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to set the output period of the symbol stop signal to a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), the output period can be set to a long time (1 second). Accordingly, since the external device (such as a hall computer) can more reliably grasp the number of symbol stops, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped.

  FIG. 25C shows an example of a payout signal output from the CN 9. As shown in the figure, when it is detected that the number of prize balls paid out by the payout control device 111 is 10, CN9 is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. When 0.2 seconds elapses, the CN 9 is set in the L output state, and is maintained in the L output state until the next payout becomes 10 balls. The rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that the number of prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111 is 10 balls or less per second. By limiting the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 in this way, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from excessively generating heat. It can suppress that a malfunction arises. Further, since the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is limited, the payout of 10 balls is not detected during 0.2 seconds when the CN 9 is set to the H output state.

  Although omitted in the figure, the jackpot signal output from the CN 12, the rotating body state signal output from the CN 13, and the abnormality detection signal output from the CN 14 are in the H output state when the respective detection conditions are satisfied. And is maintained in the H output state until the detection condition is not satisfied. Specifically, the jackpot medium signal (CN12) is set to the H output state from when the jackpot is started until it is terminated. The rotating body state signal (CN13) is set to the H output state while the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left. Further, the abnormality detection signal (CN14) is set to the H output state while an abnormality is detected for the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are diagrams showing specific examples of modes of signals output from the respective channels at the time of start-up accompanying power-on. FIG. 26 is a time chart showing the output mode of each channel when the power is turned on when the previous power interruption occurred during the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the power is turned on, the power-on signal (CN1) is first set to the H output state. From this power-on signal (CN1), the hall computer 262 can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on. Thereafter, when the process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 proceeds and the data in the RAM 203 can be read, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined based on the data stored in the RAM 203, and the gaming state is entered. Set the output of the corresponding signal. In this specific example, since it was a big hit when the power supply was cut off, it is determined that the big hit flag 203g is on, and the special gaming state signal (CN2) is set to the H output state. As described above, this H output state continues for 0.1 second, and is then set to the L output state. Based on the reception of the special gaming state signal, the hall computer 262 stores information that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit in a dedicated storage area (power recovery information storage area 203a12).

  When the output of the special game state signal (CN2) ends and falls to the L output state, the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the H output state. This H output state continues for 0.1 second as described above. The hall computer 262 determines that the notification of the gaming state has ended based on this notification end signal, and compares the gaming state at the time when the power interruption occurs with the gaming state notified this time. And if the information memorize | stored as a gaming state at the time of the last power failure is information which shows that it is jackpot, it will judge that there is no abnormality. On the other hand, if the information stored at the time of the previous power cut does not indicate that the jackpot is being hit, some sort of fraud was performed on the pachinko machine 10 during the power cut and the jackpot was forcibly set. There is a fear. Therefore, in this case, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred.

  After the output of the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the L output state, there is a period for waiting until the sub-side control device becomes operable by the wait process in the start-up process (see S1313 in FIG. 42). Since it is set, the output of the external output signal is also stopped during this period. Thereafter, when the start-up process is completed, an external output signal (see FIG. 22) for notifying information according to the game situation can be output at normal times. In the wait period set during the start-up process, the hall computer 262 side performs setting so as to receive a normal external output signal (see FIG. 22). Thereby, even if an external output signal is output from the pachinko machine 10 without any interval after the start-up process is completed, data corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 can be updated based on the external output signal.

  FIG. 27 is a time chart showing the output mode of each channel when the power is turned on when the previous power failure occurs during the probability variation state and the symbol variation. As shown in FIG. 27, when the power is turned on, the power-on signal (CN1) is set to the H output state. The hall computer 262 can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by outputting an H output signal from the CN 1. Thereafter, when the process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 proceeds and the data in the RAM 203 can be read, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined based on the data stored in the RAM 203, and the gaming state is entered. Set the output of the corresponding signal. In this specific example, since the special symbol has a high probability state when the power is turned off, it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is in the on state, and the probability variation signal (CN3) is set to the H output state. In addition, in this specific example, since the special symbol is changing when the power is turned off, it is determined that the changing flag 203h is in the on state, and the symbol changing signal (CN5) is set to the H output state. As described above, the state in which the probability variation signal (CN3) and the symbol variation signal (CN5) are set to the H output continues for 0.1 second, and is then set to the L output state. The hall computer 262 receives the probability variation signal and the symbol variation signal, and stores information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol and the variation of the special symbol. Store in the area (power recovery information storage area 203a12).

  When the H output period of the probability variation signal (CN3) and the symbol variation signal (CN5) ends and falls to the L output state, the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the H output state. This H output state continues for 0.1 second as described above. The hall computer 262 determines that the notification of the gaming state has ended based on this notification end signal, and compares the gaming state at the time when the power interruption occurs with the gaming state notified this time. Then, if the information stored as the gaming state at the previous power-off is information indicating that the special symbol is in a high probability state and that the symbol is changing, it is determined that there is no abnormality. On the other hand, if the information stored at the time of the previous power cut-off and the gaming state notified this time (during the high probability state of the special symbol and the symbol fluctuating) do not coincide with the pachinko machine 10 during the power cut-off There is a risk that some fraudulent activity has been carried out. Therefore, in this case, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred.

  After the output of the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the L output state, as described above with reference to FIG. 26, the sub-side control device can be operated by the wait process in the start-up process (see S1313 in FIG. 42). Since a period for waiting until the time is reached is set, the output of the external output signal is also stopped during this period. Thereafter, when the start-up process is completed, an external output signal (see FIG. 22) for notifying information according to the game situation can be output at normal times.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the period from the time when the power-on signal (CN1) is set to the H output state to the time when the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the H output state is Each channel of CN 6 is configured to output a signal indicating a gaming state. By referring to the state of the power-on signal (CN1) and the state of the notification end signal (CN8), an external device such as the hall computer 262 is a signal indicating a gaming state. It can be determined whether or not. Therefore, even if a signal indicating different information is output during normal operation, startup, or power-off, the hall computer 262 can easily determine the type of signal.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. As various counters, specifically, at least a prize ball counter 213a and a payout counter 213b are provided.

  The prize ball counter 213a is a counter for counting the number of prize balls notified from the main controller 110 by a prize ball command. Note that the main control device 110 monitors whether or not a game ball has won a prize for various winning holes (the first specific winning hole 65a, the first winning hole 64, etc.), and each time a winning is detected. In addition, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. When this prize ball command is received, the number of balls corresponding to the prize ball command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 213a (see S2802 in FIG. 57). The payout control device 111 is configured to determine the presence / absence of unpaid prize balls based on the value of the prize ball counter 213a and to accurately pay out the number of prize balls notified by the prize ball command. ing.

  The payout counter 213b is a counter for counting the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111. The payout counter 213b is configured so that the value is incremented by 1 each time one award ball is paid out (see S2904 in FIG. 58). When the value of the payout counter 213b reaches 10, a payout signal for notifying the hall computer 262 that the payout of 10 prize balls has been executed is output from the MPU 211 to the external output terminal board 261. At the same time (see S2906 in FIG. 58), the value of the payout counter 213b is cleared to 0 (see S2907 in FIG. 58). In other words, the payout signal is output every time 10 winning balls are paid out by the payout control device 111. The hall computer 262 grasps the number of game balls paid out by each pachinko machine 10 based on this payout signal, and totals the payout rate for each pachinko machine 10 or totals the sales of the entire hall. . The payout signal is not necessarily output every time 10 balls are paid out, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, a payout signal may be output every five balls. When the payout signal is output every 10 balls, it is impossible to grasp the number of prize balls, so the number of prize balls actually paid out and the number of payouts recognized by the hall computer 262 are not recognized. An error of 9 balls will occur at the maximum. Therefore, by configuring so as to output a payout signal every number smaller than 10 balls (for example, every 5 balls), an error between the actual payout number and the payout number grasped by the hall computer 262 is reduced. can do. Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out before outputting the payout signal may be larger than 10 balls (for example, every 20 balls). Thereby, since the frequency of outputting the payout signal is reduced, the processing load on the MPU 211 can be reduced.

  Note that the RAM 213 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. . Similarly to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 41) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, the external output terminal plate 261, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a special effect flag 223e. ing.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is a table used to determine the aspect of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of a rough variation pattern mode such as “outgoing normal reach”, “shared normal reach”, “shared special reach”, or the like. The variation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed mode of the variation pattern based on the mode of the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command. The variation pattern table 222a is a rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined for each mode.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S3308 in FIG. 62). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3302 in FIG. 62), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3402 in FIG. 63). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3202) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3305 in FIG. 62), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3407 in FIG. 63). The stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 62) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, the external device that is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment via the external output terminal plate 261 will be described. First, FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a connection state between a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in a hall and each external device. As shown in FIG. 28, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall includes a stand management device 263 installed at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and an island management device installed for each of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 (in units of amusement islands). H.264, and a hall computer 262 for collecting information of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall via a relay device 265 installed in a hall management office or the like.

  The stand management device 261 is a kind of external device that can receive a signal from the external output terminal board 261, and is installed one by one on the upper part of each pachinko machine 10. This stand management device 263 obtains information (such as the number of symbol fluctuations and the number of jackpots) of the connected pachinko machine 10 based on various signals (see FIGS. 22 and 23) output from the external output terminal board 261. The game history (game characteristics) of the connected pachinko machine 10 can be displayed based on the information. By displaying the game history, the player who is about to start the game can select the pachinko machine 10 on which the favorite game history is displayed. Each stand management device 263 is connected to an island management device 264, which is a kind of external device, and receives various signals (see FIGS. 22 and 23) received from the external output terminal board 261 to the island management device 264. Output.

  The island management device 264 is configured such that a plurality of table management devices 263 can be connected. Specifically, the island management device 264 is provided with a plurality of connection terminals (terminal A to terminal D), and one stand management device 263 can be connected to each connection terminal. Information output from the table management device 263 is received through this connection terminal. For example, when the island management device 264 receives a jackpot signal (see FIG. 22), any of the connected pachinko machines 10 is turned on by turning on an LED provided on the island management device 264, for example. Notify the entire amusement island that it was a big hit. Thereby, since it is possible to give a superiority to a player who is playing with the pachinko machine 10 that has won the jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who has won the jackpot. In addition, since the player who is playing with other pachinko machines 10 (that is, the pachinko machines 10 that have not won the jackpot) can be challenged, the player's interest in playing games Can be improved.

  The island management device 264 is assigned individual identification information for identifying each device. When the island management device 264 receives various signals (see FIGS. 22 and 23) from the table management device 263, the individual identification information and the information on the connection terminal to which the table management device 263 that received the information is connected Can be output to the relay device 265 in association with various signals received from the table management device 263.

  The relay device 265 is a kind of external device, and is configured to be able to output information received from each island management device 264 to the hall computer 262. In addition, information received from each island management device 264 can be temporarily stored. As a result, while other relay devices 265 output information to the hall computer 262, output of information to the hall computer 262 can be suppressed, so that an increase in processing load on the hall computer 262 can be suppressed. Whether or not to delay the output of information may be configured so that each relay device 265 determines, or while the hall computer 262 receives information from one relay device 265, other relay devices You may comprise so that the access from the apparatus 265 may be prohibited.

  The hall computer 262 is a kind of external device, and based on the information received from the relay device 265, the gaming status (payment of prize balls, winning status to each winning mouth, etc.) Whether the special symbol is in a high probability state, whether it is a big hit state, or the like) can be grasped. More specifically, the hall computer 262 specifies the pachinko machine 10 that has output the information based on the individual identification information output by the island management device 264 and the connection terminal information of the island management device 264. And the data of the storage area for memorize | storing the information corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 which output information among the hard disks 273 which the hall computer 262 has are updated. The hall computer 262 can calculate the payout rate and the operation rate of each pachinko machine 10 based on the data stored in the hard disk 273. Therefore, it is possible to easily analyze the sales of the entire hall, the tendency of models with a high operation rate, and the like. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, an abnormality detection signal (see FIG. 22) indicating the occurrence of the abnormality is output to the hall computer 262, so that the hall computer 262 detects that the abnormality has occurred. The machine 10 can be immediately identified and notified to the operator of the hall computer 262. Thereby, the abnormal state can be quickly eliminated by the store clerk in the hall.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the hall computer 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the hall computer 262. As shown in FIG. 29A, the hall computer 262 is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 via the relay device 265, the island management device 264, and the stand management device 263. Various signals output from the pachinko machine 10 are input to the hall computer 262 via the relay device 265, the island management device 264, and the table management device 263. The hall computer 262 executes control based on various signals output from the pachinko machine 10.

  A relay device 265 and a control device 272 are connected to the input / output port 271 of the hall computer 262. Through this input / output port 271, various signals output from the relay device 265, individual identification information of the island management device 264 to which the pachinko machine 10 that has output the signal is connected, information on connection terminals, and the like are received.

  The control device 272 executes various controls based on various signals received by the input / output port 271, individual identification information of the island management device 264, and connection terminal information. Specifically, the information of the hard disk 273 storing the information of each pachinko machine 10 is updated based on the received various signals, or the display content of the display device 274 is changed according to the contents of the received various signals. To do.

  The hard disk 273 is used to store information according to the game situation of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall and information related to the game state. The hard disk 273 is provided with a plurality of data storage areas, and is configured to store information related to one pachinko machine 10 in one storage area. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 in the hall, the first data storage area 273a that stores information on the first unit, the second data storage area 273b that stores information on the second unit, and so on. Data storage areas are provided for the number of pachinko machines 10 installed. The control device 272 outputs the information received this time from the number of pachinko machines 10 based on the individual identification information of the island management device 264 included in the information received from the relay device 265 and the connection terminal information of the island management device 264. It is determined whether the information received this time is stored in the data storage area corresponding to the determined machine number.

  Here, referring to FIG. 29 (b), the details of the information stored in each data storage area of the hard disk 273 will be described in the first data storage area 273a (that is, among the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall). A description will be given taking as an example a storage area in which information of the first unit is stored. FIG. 29B is a diagram showing the configuration of the first data storage area 273a.

  As shown in FIG. 29B, the first data storage area 273a includes a power-on flag 273a1, an out-ball number storage area 273a2, a large opening opening flag 273a3, a finger introduction award counter 273a4, and a symbol stop count counter. 273a5, through gate passage number counter 273a6, prize ball counter 273a7, payout ball number counter 273a8, inner frame opening flag 273a9, door opening flag 273a10, power interruption information storage area 273a11, power recovery information A storage area 273a12 and a startup flag 273a13 are provided at least.

  The power-on flag 273a1 is a flag indicating whether or not the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The power-on flag 273a1 is set to ON when it is detected that the power-on signal (CN1) of the pachinko machine 10 is H output (that is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) When it is detected that the power-on signal (CN1) is L output (that is, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state), it is set to off. The control unit 272 can determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is powered on based on the state of the power-on flag 273a1.

  The out ball number storage area 273a2 is a storage area for storing information indicating the total value of the number of game balls discharged through the out port 66 of the pachinko machine 10, and an out ball detection signal (output period of 0.2 seconds) Each time CN2) is detected, 10 values are added to the stored values. Based on the information indicating the total number of out balls stored in the out ball number storage area 273a2, the payout rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be calculated, or the sales of the hall can be calculated.

  The large opening opening flag 273a3 is a flag indicating the state of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a of the pachinko machine 10. The large opening flag 273a is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 2 bits), and if the upper bit is on, it indicates that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is open, If the upper bit is in an off state, it indicates that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is in a closed state. On the other hand, if the lower bit of the large opening opening flag 273a3 is on, it indicates that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open, and if the upper bit is off, 2 Indicates that the specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is closed. The upper bit of the large opening opening flag 273a3 is set to an on state when it is detected that the first large opening operation signal (CN3) is H output, and is turned off when it is detected that it is in an L output state. Set to state. In addition, the lower bit of the large opening opening flag 273a3 is set to ON when it is detected that the second large opening opening operation signal (CN4) is H output, and is detected to be L output. Set to off. The control unit 272 of the hall computer 262 determines whether or not there is an illegal act or an abnormality based on the large opening opening flag 273a3. For example, if either the upper bit or the lower bit of the large opening opening flag 273a3 is on even though the pachinko machine 10 is not in a big hit, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is performing an abnormal operation. Therefore, the abnormality can be notified immediately. Therefore, it is possible to detect and deal with an illegal act against the pachinko machine 10 or an abnormal operation of the pachinko machine 10 at an early stage.

  The start winning counter 273a4 is a counter for counting the number of times a game ball has entered the first entrance 64. The start winning counter 273a4 adds 1 to the value every time it receives a start winning signal (CN5) whose output period is 0.2 seconds.

  The symbol stop count counter 273a5 is a counter that counts the number of times the variation of the special symbol is stopped (the number of variations). Each time the symbol stop number counter 273a5 receives a symbol stop signal (CN6) whose output period is 1 second, 1 is added to the value.

  The through gate passage number counter 273a6 is a counter for counting the number of times that a game ball has entered the second entrance 67. Each time the through gate passage number counter 273a6 receives a through gate passage signal (CN7) having an output period of 0.2 seconds, 1 is added to the value.

  The prize ball counter 273a7 is a counter for counting the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out by the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. Each time the winning ball counter 273a7 receives a winning detection signal (CN8) with an output period of 0.2 seconds, 10 is added to the value.

  The payout ball number counter 273a8 is a counter that counts the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111. Each time this payout ball number counter 273a8 receives a payout signal (CN9) with an output period of 0.2 seconds, 10 is added to the value. The hall computer 262 can determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout from the value of the payout ball counter 273a8 and the value of the prize ball counter 273a7 described above. That is, if the value of the winning ball counter 273a7 is smaller than the value of the paying ball number counter 273a8, the payout control device 111 pays out the winning ball even though the payout instruction is not output from the main control device 110. Means that it is running. Therefore, since there is a possibility of causing unexpected damage to the hall by paying out too much prize balls, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the abnormality and cause the store clerk to investigate the cause of the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, damage to the hall can be suppressed.

  If the value of the prize ball counter 273a7 is larger than the value of the payout ball number counter 273a8, it means that the number of prize balls actually paid out is smaller than the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out. That is, there is a possibility that some abnormality occurs in the payout control device 111 and it is difficult to execute the payout of prize balls. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player cannot obtain the prize ball that should be originally obtained, and may cause damage to the player. Therefore, by investigating the occurrence of the abnormality, the cause of the malfunction occurring in the payout control device 111 is investigated. Can be made. Thereby, it can suppress giving a damage to a player.

  The inner frame opening flag 273a9 and the door opening flag 273a10 are flags indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, respectively. The inner frame opening flag 273a9 and the door opening flag 273a10 indicate that the inner frame 12 and the entire frame 14 are opened in the on state, and the inner frame 12 and the entire frame 14 are closed in the off state. Indicates that The inner frame opening flag 273a9 and the door opening flag 273a10 are kept on while the inner frame opening signal (CN10) and the door opening signal (CN11) are in the H output state. In addition, when the inner frame opening signal (CN10) and the door opening signal (CN11) are in the L output state, the inner frame opening flag 273a9 and the door opening flag 273a10 are set to the off state.

  The information storage area 273a11 at the time of power interruption is based on a signal (see FIG. 23) according to the gaming state output from the pachinko machine 10 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. This is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state. Based on the information stored in the power interruption information storage area 273a11, it is determined whether or not the state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal at the next power-on. Specifically, for example, if the information stored in the power interruption information storage area 273a11 is in the low probability state of the special symbol even if the special symbol is in the high probability state at power-on, the pachinko It can be determined that there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred in the machine 10. Therefore, it can be determined by the hall computer 262 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is defective. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game while the pachinko machine 10 is in an abnormal state.

  The power recovery time information storage area 273a12 indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on based on a signal (see FIG. 23) according to the gaming state output from the pachinko machine 10 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This is a storage area for storing the indicated information. By comparing the information stored in the power recovery information storage area 273a12 with the information stored in the power interruption information storage area 273a11 at the previous power interruption, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is Whether it is normal or not can be determined.

  The startup flag 273a13 is a flag indicating whether or not the comparison between the information in the power recovery information storage area 273a12 and the information in the power interruption information storage area 273a11 is completed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. If the startup flag 273a13 is on, it indicates that the information comparison has been completed and that the pachinko machine 10 has been started up. When the start-up flag 273a13 is on, the hall computer 262 sets a signal (see FIG. 22) output from the pachinko machine 10 in a normal gaming state so as to be receivable. That is, the control unit 272 determines the state of the start-up flag 273a13. It is determined that it has been received. Then, the data corresponding to the type of the received signal is updated, and the display content of the display device 274 is changed as necessary. On the other hand, when a signal having an output period of less than 0.2 seconds is received, it is determined that the output temporarily becomes H due to the influence of noise or the like, and the current stored contents are continuously held.

  Even when the start-up flag 273a13 is in the on state, if the power-on signal (CN1) is in the L output state, a signal (see FIG. 23) with an output period of 0.1 seconds is set to be receivable. The In other words, when a power interruption is detected, a special game state signal, a probability change signal, etc. (see FIG. 23) Enable reception.

  In addition, the first data storage area 273a is provided with a storage area (not shown) for storing a game history such as the number of times the pachinko machine 10 has changed and the number of jackpots. In this storage area, data can be accumulated over a plurality of dates (for example, for one week), and the game history for each date can be stored in association with the date. Based on the information stored in this storage area, the game history of each pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on the display device 274 of the hall computer 262.

  Returning to FIG. 29A, the description will be continued. In addition to the hard disk 273 described above, a display device 274 is connected to the control device 272. The control device 272 controls the display device 274 so that the game history (game characteristics) of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed. This game history is updated each time various signals are output from each pachinko machine 10 via the relay device 265. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in any of the pachinko machines 10, the display device 274 displays that the abnormality has occurred.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 55. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. After executing the through-gate passing process, a firing control process is executed (S108), an external output signal process for setting various signals (external output signals) output from the external output terminal plate 261 is executed (S109), and further Then, other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on. Details of the external output signal processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1801) of a main process (see FIG. 47) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, the changing symbol 203h is set to OFF to indicate that the special symbol has not been changed (S211). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the output of the symbol fluctuation signal (CN5) is set when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on based on the state of the changing flag 203h. The hall computer 262 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 based on the state of the symbol variation signal (whether it is in the H output state or the L output state).

  After the processing of S211 is completed, the symbol stop signal (CN6) is set to be in the H output state for 1 second in order to notify the external device that the variation of the special symbol has been stopped (S212). Then, when the variation display during execution is started in the first symbol display device 37, is the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process a big hit of the special symbol? Is determined (S213). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S214), the jackpot medium flag 203g is set to ON, and this processing is terminated. In the setting of jackpot start, the state of the normal symbol is set to the initial state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol), the number of rounds is set, and the ball waiting flag 203l is set to ON.

  In the process of S213, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S213: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (S217), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30). Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first value for high probability The random number value stored in the per random number table 202a is compared (S303), and it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S305). Note that, as described above, the random number value that is the big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a high probability is stored in the first per-random number table 202a for the high probability, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122”. , 151, 183, 218, 249, 270 ”. These random number values are compared with the value of the first per-random number counter C1, and if there is a matching random number value, the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is not on (that is, off) (S302: No), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-random number for low probability The random number value stored in the table 202a is compared (S304), and it is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Note that the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability is one of “7” stored in the first per random number table 202a for the low probability. These random number values are compared with the value of the first per-random number counter C1, and if there is a matching random number value, the special symbol is a big hit.

  If it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is a big hit (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big win is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 ( S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (big hits) It is determined which of the jackpot types is A or jackpot B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (front route jackpot) and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the jackpot It is determined that it is B (back route jackpot) (see FIG. 18B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). In addition, a stop symbol common to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as long reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, various patterns for “outside”, “outside short reach”, “outside long reach”, “outside super reach” are specified as the variation patterns for outage. Various types of “reach”, “long reach per hit”, and “per super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, it is stored in the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the stop type selection table (not shown) for high probability. The stop type is set by comparing with the random value. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S304, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbol fluctuations such as long reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1801 of the main processing (FIG. 47). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is completed, the changing flag 203h is set to ON (S312), this process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 30), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1801) of a main process (see FIG. 47) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is won (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 18A). It is determined by comparing (hit value) one by one. As described above, the random value that is a big hit of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol is one of “7” stored in the first per random number table 202a for the low probability, Random numbers that are jackpots of special symbols at high probability are stored in the first per random number table 202a for high probability, "4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270". 10 ”.

  Whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S407, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  If it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (front route jackpot) and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the jackpot It is determined that it is B (back route jackpot) (see FIG. 18B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front / rear out of reach reach as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than a back-and-forth deviation or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation flag 203e is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, it is determined that it is completely off, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, it is determined that it is reach other than front and back off. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with a random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, it is determined that the vehicle is completely out of the range, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, it is determined that the reach is other than back and forth. If it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the front / rear reach has been reached.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d stored in the ROM 202 according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Is done. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, various types of “normally out”, “outside short reach”, “outside long reach”, and “outside super reach” are defined as variation patterns for outage. As the variation pattern, various types of “per-short reach”, “long-reach per hit”, and “per-reach per reach” are defined. From the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to a predicted lottery result and a predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1801) of a main process (see FIG. 47) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the first specific winning opening 65a. This is because a ball that has been opened and intended to win the first specific winning slot 65a is prevented from entering the first winning slot 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the 1st specific winning opening 65a is provided just under the 1st entrance 64, even if it is suppressing that a ball enters into the 1st entrance 64 during the big hit of a special design, Many balls enter the first entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 18C).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507, Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 18C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S1809) of the main process (see FIG. 47) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S525, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1807) of the main process (see FIG. 47) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S603: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the external output signal processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the external output signal processing (S109). This external output signal processing (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30), and sets various signals (external output signals) output to the external device via the external output terminal 261. It is processing of.

  In the external output signal processing, first, out sphere detection signal processing for setting the output of the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is executed (S701). Details of the out-sphere detection signal processing (S701) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, start winning signal processing for setting the output of the start winning signal (CN5) is executed (S702). Details of the start winning signal processing (S702) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, gate pass signal processing for setting the output of the through gate pass signal (CN7) is executed (S703). Details of the gate passing signal processing (S703) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S703 is completed, an opening signal setting process for setting the output of the inner frame opening signal (CN10) and the door opening signal (CN11) is executed (S704), and this process ends. Details of the release signal setting process (S704) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the out sphere detection signal processing (S701) which is one processing of the external output signal processing (see FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing out-sphere detection signal processing. This out sphere detection signal process is a process for setting the output of the out sphere detection signal (CN2) as described above.

  In the out ball detection signal processing (S701), first, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out port 66 (S801). If it is determined that there is an out ball (S801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the out ball counter 203r (S802). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the out sphere counter 203 after addition is 10 (S803), and when it is determined that it is 10 (S803: Yes), the value of the out sphere counter 203r is set to 0. Thus, the out sphere counter 203 is initialized (S804), and it is determined whether or not the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is in the H output state (S805).

  In the process of S805, when it is determined that the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is in the H output state (S805: Yes), the H output period of the currently output out sphere detection signal ends, and the predetermined period (0 .2 seconds), the process for setting the output of the out-sphere detection signal corresponding to the tenth out-sphere detected this time is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the out-ball detection signal (CN2) currently set in the H output state becomes the L output state is specified (S807). Then, based on the specified remaining period, a delay time is set for the out sphere detection signal output corresponding to the tenth out sphere detected this time (S808), and this process is terminated. For example, when it is determined that the remaining period until the out sphere detection signal (CN2) during H output is in the L output state is 0.1 second, the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is in the H output state next. Is set to 0.3 seconds (the remaining period of the H output state is 0.1 seconds + the L output period is 0.2 seconds). In this way, by setting the L period of 0.2 seconds, the number of times the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is set to the H output state is externally detected even if the out sphere is continuously detected in a short period of time. The device can grasp accurately.

  In the process of S805, when it is determined that the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is not in the H output state (that is, in the L output state) (S805: No), the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is 0.2. It sets so that it may be in the state of H output for a second (S806), and complete | finishes this process. Even if the out-ball detection signal (CN2) is in the L output state (S805: No), the L output state is set to 0 if it is within 0.2 seconds after being set in the L output state. .Set for H output after continuing for 2 seconds. Thus, by securing an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if an out sphere is detected continuously in a short time, the out sphere detection signal (CN2) is H output. The external device can accurately grasp the number of times set in the state.

  If the out sphere is not detected in the process of S801 (S801: No), and if the value of the out sphere counter 203r is less than 10 in the process of S803 (S803: No), the process is performed in S809. Migrate to In the processing of S809, it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S809).

  If it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S809: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S809: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has elapsed (S810), and the delay period has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not present (S810: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the delay period has elapsed in the process of S810 (S810: Yes), the out-sphere detection signal (CN2) is set to the H output state (S811), and this process ends.

  Next, the start winning signal process (S702), which is one process of the external output signal process (see FIG. 36), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning signal processing. This start winning signal process is a process for setting the output of the start winning detection signal (CN5) as described above.

  In the start winning signal processing (S702), first, it is determined whether or not a winning (start winning) to the first ball slot 64 is detected (S901). Specifically, the detection information of the various switches stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) is read, and the detection information indicating the winning to the first entrance 64 is stored. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in the process of S901 that a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected (S901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the state of the start winning signal (CN5) is an H output state. If it is determined that the state is in the H output state (S902: Yes), after the H output period of the start winning signal currently being output ends and a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) elapses. Then, a process for setting the output of the start winning signal corresponding to the detected start winning is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the start winning signal (CN5) currently set to the H output state becomes the L output state is specified (S904). Then, based on the identified remaining period, a delay time is set for the start winning signal output corresponding to the start winning detected this time (S905), and this process is terminated. For example, when it is determined that the remaining period until the start winning signal (CN5) during H output becomes the L output state is 0.1 second, the start winning signal (CN5) is set to the H output state next. Is set to 0.3 seconds (the remaining period of H output state is 0.1 seconds + L output period is 0.2 seconds). In this way, by setting the L period of 0.2 seconds, the number of times that the start winning signal (CN5) is set to the H output state is determined even if the start winning is detected continuously in a short period. Can be grasped accurately.

  In the processing of S902, when it is determined that the start winning signal (CN5) is not in the H output state (that is, in the L output state) (S902: No), the start winning signal (CN5) is H for 0.2 seconds. An output state is set (S903), and this process is terminated. Even if the start winning signal (CN5) is in the L output state (S902: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds after the start winning signal is set to the L output state, the L output state is set to 0. 0. It is set to be in the H output state after continuing for 2 seconds. In this way, by securing an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if a start winning is continuously detected in a short time, the start winning signal (CN5) is in the H output state. The external device can accurately grasp the set number of times.

  If the start winning is not detected in the process of S901 (S901: No), it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S906). If it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S906: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S906: Yes), it is determined whether the set delay period has elapsed (S907), and the delay period has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not present (S907: No), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the delay period has elapsed in the processing of S907 (S907: Yes), the start winning signal (CN5) is set to the H output state (S908), and this processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the gate passing signal processing (S703) which is one processing of the external output signal processing (see FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing gate passing signal processing. This gate passing signal processing is processing for setting the output of the through gate passing signal (CN7) as described above.

  In the gate passing signal process (S703), first, it is determined whether or not a winning at the second entrance 67 is detected (S1001). Specifically, the detection information of the various switches stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) is read, and the detection information indicating the winning at the second entrance 67 is stored. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1001 that a winning at the second entrance 67 has been detected (S1001: Yes), then whether or not the state of the through gate passing signal (CN7) is an H output state is determined. When it is determined (S1002) and it is determined that the state is the H output state (S1002: Yes), the H output period of the through-gate passing signal currently being output ends, and a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) elapses. Then, processing for setting the output of the through gate passing signal corresponding to the winning to the second entrance 67 detected this time is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the through gate passing signal (CN7) currently set in the H output state becomes the L output state is specified (S1004). Then, based on the identified remaining period, a delay time is set for the through-gate passing signal output corresponding to the winning at the second entrance 67 detected this time (S1005), and this process is terminated. For example, when it is determined that the remaining period until the through gate passing signal (CN7) during H output becomes the L output state is 0.1 second, the through gate passing signal (CN7) is set to the H output state next. Is set to 0.3 seconds (the remaining period of the H output state is 0.1 seconds + the L output period is 0.2 seconds). In this way, by setting the L period of 0.2 seconds, the number of times that the through-gate passing signal (CN7) is set to the H output state can be calculated even if the start winning is continuously detected in a short period. The device can grasp accurately.

  In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the through gate pass signal (CN7) is not in the H output state (that is, the L output state) (S1002: No), the through gate pass signal (CN7) is 0.2. It sets so that it may be in the state of H output for a second (S1003), and complete | finishes this process. Even if the through-gate passing signal (CN7) is in the L output state (S1002: No), the L output state is set to 0 if it is within 0.2 seconds after being set in the L output state. .Set for H output after continuing for 2 seconds. In this way, by securing an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if a winning to the second entrance 67 is detected continuously in a short time, a through gate passing signal is detected. The external device can accurately grasp the number of times (CN7) is set to the H output state.

  In the process of S1001, if no winning at the second entrance 67 is detected (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S1006). ). If it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S1006: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S1006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has elapsed (S1007), and the delay period has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not present (S1007: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In the process of S907, when it is determined that the delay period has elapsed (S1007: Yes), the through gate passing signal (CN7) is set to the H output state (S1008), and this process ends.

  Next, the open signal process (S704), which is one process of the external output signal process (see FIG. 36), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the release signal processing. As described above, the opening signal processing is processing for setting the output of the inner frame opening signal (CN10) and the door opening signal (CN11).

  In this release signal processing (S704), it is first determined whether or not the inner frame 12 has been released (S1101). If it is determined that the inner frame 12 has been released (S1101: Yes), the inner frame release signal (CN10) ) Is set to the H output state (S1102), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is opened (S1101: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S1103). When it is determined that the inner frame 13 is closed (S1103: Yes), the inner frame opening signal (CN10) set to the H output state is set to the L output state (S1104), and this process is terminated. To do.

  In the process of S1103, when it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S1103: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is opened (S1105). As a result of the process of S1105, when it is determined that the full frame 14 is opened (S1105: Yes), the door open signal (CN11) is set to the H output state (S1106), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is not detected that the full frame 14 is opened (S1105: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S1107: Yes), and the full frame 14 is closed. If it is determined that the door is open (S1107: Yes), the door open signal (CN11) set to the H output state is set to the L output state (S1108), and the process is terminated. If it is not detected in the process of S1107 that the full frame 14 is closed (S1107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the external output signal process (see FIG. 36) is executed every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), and the game of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Information corresponding to the situation is output from the external output terminal version 261 to the external device. An external device such as the hall computer 262 can grasp the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 in real time based on the information output from the external output terminal version 261. As a result, it is possible to accurately manage the payout rate and operating status of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of abnormality or fraud.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the information on the occurrence of power interruption in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on occurrence of power interruption (S1201). Then, the power-on signal (CN1) is set to the L output state (S1202), and the NMI interrupt process is terminated. By setting the power-on signal to the L output state, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can easily grasp that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, the power-on signal (CN1) is set to the H output state (S1302), and access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1303).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1304). If it is turned on (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1316. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305), and if not stored (S1305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1316 also in this case.

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1306), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1307). : No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not coincide with the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in this case, the process proceeds to S1316. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1818 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1316, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1316). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1317 to S1319) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1317 to S1319) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1317 to S1319) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1317 to S1319), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1317). Thereafter, an initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1318), and a RAM initialization signal output process for outputting a RAM initialization signal indicating that the RAM 203 has been initialized to an external device is executed (S1319). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1311. Details of the RAM initialization signal output process (S1319) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1305: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S1307: Yes), the occurrence information of power-off is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1309). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. When the process of S1309 is completed, a state confirmation process, which is a process for confirming whether there is any abnormality in the gaming state when the power is turned on, is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. Details of this state confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1310 or the process of S1311 executed after the process of S1319, a startup signal output process for setting the signal output according to the gaming state is executed from the external output terminal board 261 (S1311), and then Then, a rotating body position initialization process for correcting the state of the sorting rotating body 741 provided in the lottery device 700 as necessary is executed (S1312). The details of the startup signal output process (S1311) and the rotating body position initialization process (S1312) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, respectively.

  After completion of the rotating body position initialization process (S1312), the wait is made to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. Processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S1313). Then, the process proceeds to the processing of S1314, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S1314). Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1315), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the state confirmation process (S1310) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this state confirmation processing. As described above, the state confirmation process is a process for confirming whether the gaming state at the time of power-on is normal.

  In this state confirmation process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 203g is on (S1404). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203g is on (S1404: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203e is on (S1402). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1402: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined by the process of S1402 that the probability variation flag 203e is on (S1402: Yes), the first round of the previous jackpot is first based on the information stored in the entrance type storage area 203p. The type of the entrance into which the game ball entered is specified (S1403). Then, it is determined whether or not the specific result is the short time entrance 501 (S1404). If it is determined that the specific time is the short time entrance 501 (S1404), the player has entered the probability variation entrances 502 to 504. Although it means that the current gaming state is a high probability state of a special symbol in spite of the absence, an abnormality notification is set (S1405), and this process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S1404, if it is determined that the entrance into which the game ball entered at the previous big hit is not the short-time entrance 501 (that is, any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504), This process ends.

  By this state confirmation process, when the power is turned off, an abnormality can be quickly notified when the state is shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol by an illegal act. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started by an unauthorized player, giving an unfair advantage to the unauthorized player and damaging the hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the RAM initialization signal output process (S1319) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this RAM initialization signal output processing. As described above, the RAM initialization signal output process is a process for outputting a RAM initialization signal indicating that the RAM 203 has been initialized to an external device.

  In this RAM initialization signal output process, first, the RAM initialization signal (CN7) is set to the H output state (S1501). Then, it is determined whether or not 0.1 second has elapsed since the RAM initialization signal (CN7) was set to the H output state (S1502), and when it is determined that 0.1 second has not elapsed. (S1502: No), the process of S1502 is executed again. The process of S1502 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that 0.1 second has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that 0.1 second has elapsed (S1502: Yes), the RAM initialization signal (CN7) is set to the L output state (S1503), and this process ends. Based on the RAM initialization signal (CN7) set to the H output state by this RAM initialization signal output process, the external device can easily determine that the RAM 203 has been initialized. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the external device from comparing the gaming state when the power is turned off and the gaming state when the power is turned on unnecessarily even though the contents of the RAM 203 are initialized.

  Note that the process (S1502) of holding the RAM initialization signal that has started output in the H output state for 0.1 second is not necessarily performed in this process. For example, in the RAM initialization signal output process (see FIG. 44), only the process of setting the RAM initialization signal to the H output state may be performed. Then, during the wait process (see S1313 in FIG. 42) of the start-up process (see S1313 in FIG. 42), while waiting for the sub-side control device to start up, the signal output period is determined and set to the L output state. It may be determined whether or not to do so.

  Next, a startup signal output process (S1311) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the startup process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the startup signal output processing. The startup signal output process is a process for setting the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 according to the gaming state as described above.

  In this start-up signal output process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203g is on (S1601). If it is determined that it is on (S1601: Yes), the special gaming state signal (CN2) Is set to the H output state (S1602), and the process proceeds to S1603. If it is determined that the big hit flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the process of S1602 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1603.

  In the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203e is on (S1603). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is on (S1603: Yes), the probability variation signal (CN3) is set to the H output state ( The process proceeds to S1604) and S1605. If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is not on (ie, is off) (S1603: No), the process of S1604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1605.

  In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the value of the time-shortage counter 203f is 1 or more (S1605). If it is determined that it is 1 or more (S1605: Yes), the time-shortening signal (CN4) is output as H. (S1606), and the process proceeds to S1607. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1607.

  In the processing of S1607, it is determined whether or not the changing flag 203h is on (S1607). If it is determined that it is on (S1607: Yes), the symbol variation signal (CN5) is set to the H output state. (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609. If it is determined that the value of the changing flag 203h is not on (that is, is off) (S1607: No), the process of S1608 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1609.

  In the processing of S1609, it is determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1609). If it is determined that it is on (S1609: Yes), the rotating body signal (CN6) is set to the H output state. (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1611. If it is determined that the value of the rotator flag 203j is not on (that is, it is off) (S1609: No), the process of S1610 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1611.

  In the process of S1611, the signal output states of CN2 to CN6 are detected, and it is determined whether or not there is a channel in the H output state (S1611). If it is determined by the processing of S1611 that there is a channel that is in the H output state (S1611: Yes), it is determined whether 0.1 second has elapsed since the H output state was set (S1612). If the elapsed time is less than 0.1 second (S1612: No), the process proceeds to S1612 again, and the process of S1612 is repeated until 0.1 second elapses.

  If it is determined by the processing of S1612 that 0.1 second has elapsed (S1612: Yes), the output of the channel that is in the H output state among the channels CN2 to CN6 is changed to the L output state. The setting is made (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1614. If it is determined in the process of S1611 that all of CN2 to CN6 are in the L output state (S1611: No), the processes of S1612 and S1613 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1614.

  In the processing of S1614, the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the H output state (S1614), and it is determined whether 0.1 second has elapsed (S1615). In the process of S1615, when it is determined that the elapsed time is less than 0.1 second (S1615: No), the process is transferred again to S1615, and the process of S1615 is repeated until 0.1 second elapses. If it is determined in step S1615 that 0.1 second has elapsed (S1615: Yes), the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the L output state (S1616), and the process ends.

  Note that the processing (S1612, S1615) for holding the external output signal that has started output in the H output state for 0.1 second is not necessarily performed in this processing. For example, in the startup signal output process (see FIG. 45), only the process of setting the external output signal to the H output state may be performed. Then, during the wait process (see S1313 in FIG. 42) of the start-up process (see S1313 in FIG. 42), while waiting for the sub-side control device to start up, the signal output period is determined and set to the L output state. It may be determined whether or not to do so.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the rotating body position initialization process (S1312) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the rotating body position initialization process (S1312).

  As described above, the rotating body position initialization process (S1312) is a process of correcting the position (orientation) of the sorting rotating body 741 disposed in the lottery device 700 as necessary. The case where the correction is necessary is, for example, a case where the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 has changed between the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the next time the power is turned on. In addition, the arrangement | positioning which the distribution rotary body 741 can take has arrangement | positioning (refer FIG. 12) of the state swung to the right side, and arrangement | positioning (refer FIG. 15) of the state swung to the left side. The right side swings when the initialization is performed (that is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on) or when the sorting rotator 741 is left-handed. This is a case where the game ball enters the back route guide hole 742b in a state of swinging (see FIG. 13). On the other hand, the state of swinging to the left is when the game ball enters the front route guide hole 742a with the sorting rotating body 741 swinging to the right (see FIG. 14).

  When the sorting rotating body 741 is swung to the left (see FIG. 15), the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a enters the probability variation entrance 503 through the guide passage 745c ( 14), the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b enters the probability variation entrance 504 via the guide passage 745d (see FIG. 15). On the other hand, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right (see FIG. 12), the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a enters the short time entrance 501 via the guide passage 745a. However, the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b enters the probability changing entrance 502 through the guide passage 745b (see FIG. 13).

  That is, when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left, the lottery by the lottery device 700 always shifts to a special symbol high probability state, but when the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right, the game There is a possibility that the sphere enters the short time entrance 501 and shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Therefore, when the sorting rotating body 741 that has been swung to the right side when the power is turned off is switched to a state that has been swung to the left side while the power is turned off, it is advantageous for the player without a legitimate opportunity. As a result, the hall may be damaged unexpectedly. On the other hand, if the sorting rotating body 741 that has been swung to the left side when the power is turned off is switched to a state that has been swung to the right side while the power is turned off, it is in a disadvantageous state for the player without a legitimate opportunity Therefore, there is a risk of unexpected damage to the player. Therefore, by performing this processing, the state of the sorting rotator 741 is corrected as necessary to prevent unexpected damage to the hall and the player.

  In this rotating body position initialization process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1701), and it is determined that it is turned on. In the case (S1701: Yes), the process proceeds to S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, it is off), it is further determined whether or not the rotator flag 203j is on (S1703). If it is determined that it is not (that is, it is OFF), the process proceeds to S1702.

  In the process of S1702, the rotation motor support 264 for rotating the sorting rotator 741 is driven, and the rotator support shaft is arranged so that the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right (see FIG. 12). It is rotated around 806a and 806b (S1704), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the startup process.

  In the processing of S1703, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1703: Yes), the state of the sorting rotating body 741 before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is in the state of swinging to the left side. Therefore, the rotation motor 264 for rotating the sorting rotator 741 is driven so that the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left (see FIG. 15). End and return to the startup process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1801 to S1809 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update processing of S1812 and S1813 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 30), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 30) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command and the winning information command set in the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 31) and the start winning process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803). Then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1804). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a predetermined number of balls have been won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Determine whether. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning port 65a is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1805) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, in order to set the gaming state after the jackpot end based on the type of the entrance (the short time entrance 501 and the probability change entrance 501 to 504) that the game ball first entered after the jackpot started. Is executed (S1805). Details of this incoming ball detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the entrance detection process is completed, a rotating body position detection process is performed in which the arrangement (orientation) of the sorting rotating body 741 disposed in the lottery device 700 is determined based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 ( S1806). Details of this rotating body position detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the rotating body position detection process (S1806) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  When the rotating body position detection process (S1806) ends, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1807). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 34), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1808). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 32). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1809). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) or the process of S521, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34), the second symbol display device 83 executes it. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1810). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1810: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1811). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the above-described processes after S1801 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1811: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1812, S1813).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1812). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1812).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1809 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1810, if power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1810: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 41 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1814 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1814), and all signals set to the H output state are set to the L output state in each channel of the external output terminal version 261 (S1815). Then, a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) (S1816). Next, a power interruption signal output process for outputting a signal indicating the gaming state when the power is turned off to the external device is executed (S1817). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1818), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1819), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the process of S1810 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1809, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1812 and S1813 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1801. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, and the initial setting process (see S1301 in FIG. 42). Since the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1801. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot or a specific winning prize ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1901). Specifically, if the jackpot start is set by the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113.

  Next, the flow path switching member 734 is driven to the front side of the front view, thereby setting the flow path to the back route (S1903). Then, the large opening port flag 203m, the flow path flag 203n, and the payout flag 203o are set to OFF (S1904), the state of the big hit medium signal (CN12) is set to the H output state (S1905), and this process is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol jackpot is not started in the process of S1901 (S1901: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1906). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1906, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1906, if the special symbol is a big hit (1906: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1907). As a result of the determination, if it is the start timing of a new round (S1907: Yes), a round start process that is a process for setting the start of the round is executed (S1908), and this process is terminated. Details of the round start process (S1908) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1907 (S1907: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1909). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls is won after opening the ball, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1909, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1909: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) A second large opening setting process for setting the opening / closing of 140a is executed (S1915), and then a flow path setting process for setting a flow path through which the game ball can flow in the traveling direction distribution unit 730 is executed. In step S1916, the process is terminated. Details of the second large opening setting process (S1915) and the flow path setting process (S1916) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, respectively.

  In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the closing condition for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1909: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set. It is closed (S1910), and the large opening flag 203m is set to OFF (S1911). Next, the first large opening operation signal (CN3) set to the H output state is set to the L output state (S1912). The external device such as the hall computer 262 accurately grasps the state of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a based on the state of the first large opening operation signal (CN3), The presence or absence of abnormal operation can be determined.

  When the processing of S1912 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the final round has ended (S1913). If it is determined that the final round is not final (S1913: No), this processing ends and the main processing (FIG. 47) is completed. Return to Browse. On the other hand, if it is determined that the final round has ended (S1913: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the jackpot end is executed (S1914), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 49, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48), when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (see S1907: Yes in FIG. 48), the round start is executed. Processing will be described. This round start process (S1908) is a process for performing various settings for starting a new round.

  In the round start process, first, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S2001). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S2001 is completed, the value of the time counter 203k is then reset to measure the elapsed time since the start of a new round (S2002). Then, it is determined whether or not the newly started round is the first round (S2003). If it is determined that the first round is the first round (S2003: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the newly started round is not the first round (that is, any of the second to eighth rounds) as a result of the process of S2003 (S2003: No), the first specific winning opening The opening of the (first large opening) 65a is set (S2004), and the first large opening operation signal (CN3) is set to the H output state (S2005). The external device such as the hall computer 262 accurately grasps the state of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a based on the state of the first large opening operation signal (CN3), The presence or absence of abnormal operation can be determined. After the process of S2005 is complete | finished, this process is complete | finished and it returns to jackpot control processing (refer FIG. 48).

  Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 50, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the final round (see S1913: Yes in FIG. 48), the jackpot end process is executed. (S1914) will be described. This jackpot end process (S1914) is a process for setting the jackpot end.

  In the jackpot end process, first, an ending command indicating the jackpot end is set (S2001). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S2101 ends, it is then determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203q is on (S2102). If it is determined that it is on (S2102: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to on. Thus, the gaming state is set to a high probability state with a special symbol (S2103), and the process proceeds to S2105. On the other hand, in the process of S2102, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203q is off (S2102: No), the probability variation flag 203e is set to off, and the special symbol is set to a low probability state, and the time-short / medium counter is set. Setting the value of 203f to 50 sets the normal symbol to the short time state (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. Note that the probability variation setting flag 203q is a flag that is turned on when a ball enters any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 in the first round, as described above.

  In the process of S2105, which is shifted to after the process of S2103 or S2104, the jackpot setting is cleared (reset) by setting each of the flow path flag 203n, the payout flag 203o, the probability variation setting flag 203q, and the jackpot flag 203g to off. (S2105). Then, the jackpot signal (CN12) that has been set to the H output state is set to the L output state to notify the external device that the jackpot state has ended. An external device such as the hall computer 262 can determine the presence / absence of an abnormality or fraud based on the state of the jackpot signal (CN12). Further, when the process of S2105 ends, this process ends.

  Next, the second large opening setting process (S1915), which is one process in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This second large opening setting process (S1915) is a process for setting the opening / closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in the first round of the big hit.

  In this second large opening setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is the first round of jackpot (S2201), not the first round (that is, the second to eighth rounds, or the interval period between rounds) If it is determined that it is in the middle (S2201: No), it is not necessary to drive the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, and thus the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that it is the first round (S2201: Yes), in order to set the opening / closing of the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a, first, the second large opening The mouth switching table 202e is read (S2202). Then, in the read second large opening switching table 202e, the specified content corresponding to the current jackpot type is compared with the value of the time counter 203k, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Is determined (S2203), and it is determined whether or not the present time is a period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a should be opened (S2204).

  In the process of S2204, if it is determined that the current period is the open state (S2204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the large open mouth flag 203m is set to on (S2205) and set to on. If it has been done (S2205: Yes), it indicates that the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a has already been opened, so this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the large open mouth flag 203m is not on (that is, off) (S2205: No), the second specific winning opening (second large open mouth) 140a is closed. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the open state (S2206) and the second large opening operation signal (CN4) is set to the H output state. (S2207). The external device such as the hall computer 262 accurately grasps the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a based on the state of the second large opening operation signal (CN4), The presence or absence of abnormal operation can be determined.

  After the process of S2207 is completed, the large opening mouth flag 203m is set to ON (S2208), and this process is terminated. Since the large open mouth flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S2208, in the second large open mouth setting process (S1915) after the next time, in the process of S2205, the second specific winning opening (second large open mouth) 140a. Is already open, the process can be terminated as it is.

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the present time is not the period in which the second specific prize opening (second large opening) 140a should be in the open state (that is, the period in which the second specific prize opening is to be closed) (S2204). Next, it is determined whether or not the large opening mouth flag 203s is set to off (S2209). If it is determined to be off (S2209: Yes), the second specific prize opening (second Since this indicates that the (large opening) 140a is in a closed state, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, when it is determined that the large opening flag 203m is not off (that is, is on) (S2209: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (S2210), and the second large opening operation signal (CN4) is set to the L output state. (S2211). The external device such as the hall computer 262 accurately grasps the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a based on the state of the second large opening operation signal (CN4), The presence or absence of abnormal operation can be determined.

  After the process of S2211 is completed, the large opening port flag 203m is set to OFF (S2212), and this process is terminated. Since the large open mouth flag 203m is set to OFF in the process of S2211, in the second large open mouth setting process (S1915) after the next time, in the process of S2209, the second specific winning opening (second large open mouth) 140a. Is already open, the process can be terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the flow path setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the flow path setting process (S1916). The flow path setting process (S1916) is one process in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48). As described above, the flow that flows down when the game ball enters the lottery device 700 in the first round, as described above. This is a process for setting the path to either the front side flow path 732a or the back side flow path 732b.

  In the flow path setting process (S1916), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the first round (S2301). And when it is determined that it is not the first round (that is, any one of the second to eighth rounds and the interval period between rounds) (S2301: No), it is not necessary to switch the flow path. This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that it is the first round (S2301: Yes), first, the flow path switching table 202f is read in order to set the flow path (S2302). Then, the read contents of the flow path switching table 202f and the value of the time counter 203k are compared to identify the flow path state (front side flow path 732a, back side flow path 732b) (S2303). Is a period to be set in the back channel 732b (back route period) (S2304).

  In the processing of S2304, when it is determined that the current time is the period (back route period) to be set for the back side flow path 732b (S2304: Yes), it is determined whether the flow path flag 203n is set to OFF. However, if it is set to off (S2305: Yes), it indicates that the flow path has already been set to the back flow path 732b (the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted forward). Therefore, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2305 that the flow path flag 203n is not off (that is, is on) (S2305: No), it indicates that the flow path is set to the near flow path 732a. Therefore, by tilting the flow path switching valve 731 toward the front side, the back side flow path 732b is opened, and the game ball is set so that it can travel the back route via the back route guide hole 742b (S2306). Then, the flow path flag 203n is set to ON (S2307), and this process ends. By setting the flow path flag 203n to OFF in the process of S2307, it is determined in the subsequent flow path setting process (S1916) that the flow path has already been set to the back flow path 732b in the process of S2305. Therefore, the process can be ended as it is.

  Further, in the process of S2304, when it is determined that the current time is not a period to be set for the back side flow path 732b (that is, a period to be set for the front side flow path 732a) (S2304: No), then It is determined whether or not the flow path flag 203n is set to ON (S2308). If it is determined to be ON (S2308: Yes), it is determined that the flow path has already been set to the near-side flow path 732a. Therefore, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2308, when it is determined that the flow path flag 203n is not on (that is, is off) (S2308: No), the flow path is set to the back flow path 732b. Therefore, by setting the flow path switching member 731 to the back side, the front side flow path 732a is opened, and the game ball is set so that it can travel the front route through the front route guide hole 742a (S2309). ). Then, the flow path flag 203n is set to ON (S2310), and this process ends. By setting the flow path flag 203n to ON in the process of S2310, in the subsequent flow path setting process (S1916), it is determined in the process of S2308 that the flow path has already been set to the near flow path 732a. Therefore, the process can be ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the entrance detection process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This entrance detection process (S1805) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 47) of the main controller 110. As described above, after the start of the jackpot, the entrance to which the game ball entered first This is a process for setting a gaming state after the jackpot has ended based on the types of mouths (time-shortening entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504).

  In the incoming ball detection process (S1805), it is first determined whether or not the payout flag 203o is on (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the payout flag 203o is on (S2401: Yes), it indicates that the game is being jackpoted and the lottery of the gaming state after the jackpot has been completed. It is determined whether or not it is detected that a game ball has entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (S2402).

  When it is determined in the process of S2402 that it has been detected that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has entered the game ball ( (S2402: Yes), the payout of prize balls to be given to the player is set (S2403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a game ball has not entered either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (S2402: No), The processing of S2403 is skipped, and this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the payout flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S2401: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball waiting flag 203l is set to on (S2404). ). In the process of S2404, if it is determined that the incoming ball waiting flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S2404: No), it means that the current time is not a period for drawing lottery after the jackpot. Therefore, this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball waiting flag 203l is on (S2404: Yes), it is determined that a game ball has entered one of the probability variation ball openings (probability variation ball openings 502 to 504). It is determined whether or not it has been detected (S2405), and if it is determined that a game ball has entered, information corresponding to the type of the entrance into which the game ball has entered is stored in the entrance type storage area 203p is stored (S2406), and the probability variation setting flag 203q is turned on (S2407). Based on the probability variation setting flag 203q, a special symbol high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2103 in FIG. 50).

  When the processing of S2407 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the entrance into which the game ball has entered is a probability variation entrance 503 (S2408), and if it is determined that it is a probability variation entrance 503 (S2408). : Yes), a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2410), and the process proceeds to S2411. Note that the normal state command is a command for executing the effect in a normal manner when executing the variable effect or the like.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2408, when it is determined that the entrance into which the game ball entered is not the probability variation entrance 503 (that is, the probability variation entrance 502 or the probability variation entrance 504) (S2408: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2409), and the process proceeds to S2411. This loop state command is a command for executing an effect (loop state effect) in a special mode different from normal.

  When the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 502 or the probability variation ball entrance 504, the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left side. Therefore, the entrance divide by the sorting rotator 741 in the next big hit is the probability variation. It is limited to the entrance 503 or the probability variation entrance 504 (see FIGS. 14 and 15). Therefore, not only after the end of the current jackpot, but also after the end of the next jackpot, it becomes a very advantageous state (a loop state in which the high probability state of the special symbol loops). In this loop state, by executing a special effect (loop state effect) based on the loop state command, the player can easily recognize that it is in the loop state, so a loop advantageous to the player It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that it is in a state.

  Note that the loop status command set in the processing of S2409 or the normal status command set in the processing of S2410 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 47) in the external output process (S1801). The sound lamp control device 113 switches the effect mode to be executed according to whether the normal state command or the loop state command is received. Specifically, when a loop state command is received, a loop state effect that suggests an advantageous state for the player is executed. Thereby, it can suppress that a player quits a game without noticing that it is in a loop state.

  In the processing of S2411 that is executed after the processing of S2409 or S2410 is completed, in order to indicate that the lottery of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is completed, the ball waiting flag 203l is set to OFF, and the payout flag 203o Is set to ON (S2411), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2405, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probability variation entrances (probability entry entrances 502 to 504) (S2405: No), then, to the time entry entrance 501 It is determined whether or not it is detected that a game ball has entered (S2412). If it is determined that the game ball has not entered the short-time entrance 501 (S2412: No), then, the end condition of the first round, which is a lottery for the game state after the big hit It is determined whether or not is established (S2413). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the round.

  In the process of S2413, if it is determined that the end condition of the first round is not satisfied (S2413: No), this means that the period for drawing the game state after the jackpot ends continues, so this process is continued. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition of the first round is satisfied (S2413: Yes), the process proceeds to S2414 in order to shift the gaming state to the low probability state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot.

  Here, when one round is completed without entering any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504), the state shifts to a special symbol low probability state. The reason for this is to prevent the player from shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol that is advantageous to the player simply by not launching the game ball in the first round. In other words, when a game ball does not enter any of the entrances (time-short entrance 501 and probability variation entrances 502 to 504), it is configured to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. Then, with the game method of launching game balls after the 2nd round, the game ball is not launched until the end of the 1st round, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued while winning prize balls in the 2nd to 8th rounds. I can continue to let you. Therefore, in order to prevent the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed from suffering a disadvantage, a game ball is placed in each of the entrances (the short entrance entrance 501 and the probable entrance entrances 502 to 504). When it does not enter, it is configured to shift to a low probability state of a special symbol.

  Further, in the processing of S2412, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the short time entrance 501 (S2412: Yes), in order to shift the gaming state to the low probability state of the special symbol at the end of the jackpot, S2413 The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2414.

  In the processing of S2414, information indicating the short-time entrance 501 is stored in the entrance type storage area 203p (S2414). Next, the probability variation setting flag 203q is set to OFF (S2415). As a result, a special symbol low probability state is set at the end of the jackpot and 50 normal symbol time-short states are set (see S2104 in FIG. 50).

  When the processing of S2415 is completed, a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2416). Then, in order to indicate that the lottery of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot has been completed, the ball waiting flag 203l is set to OFF, the payout flag 203o is set to ON (S2417), and this process ends.

  Next, the rotating body position detection process (S1806) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the rotating body position detection process (S1806). This rotary body position detection process (S1806) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 47), the arrangement of the sorting rotary body 741 is stored in the rotary body flag 203j, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. This is also a process for enabling the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 to be returned to the same arrangement as that immediately before the power is turned off at the time of power recovery.

  In this rotor position detection process (S1806), first, it is determined whether or not the rotor flag 203j is on (S2501). If it is determined as a result of the processing of S2501 that the rotator flag 203j is on (S2501: Yes), it is determined that the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 has swung to the left in the previous rotator position detection process. Therefore, based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, it is determined whether or not the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left side, so that the previous rotator position detection process and the current rotation are determined. It is determined whether or not the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 has changed during the body position detection process (S2502).

  If it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right (S2502: Yes), the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 has changed since the previous rotator position detection process. Therefore, the rotating body state signal (CN13) set to the H output state is set to the L output state (S2503), the rotating body flag 203j is turned off (S2504), and this process is terminated. . The external device such as the hall computer 262 can grasp the state of the sorting rotator 741 based on the state of the rotator state signal (CN13), and thus determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sorting rotator 741 and whether or not an illegal act has occurred. can do.

  In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left (S2502: No), the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 changes from the time of the previous rotator position detection process. Since this is not done, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the rotator flag 203j is not on (that is, off) (S2501: No), the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 is determined based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. It is determined whether or not it is in a state of swinging to the right side (S2505), and when it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 is swinging to the right side (S2505: Yes), the placement of the sorting rotator 741 is determined. Has not changed from the time of the previous rotor position detection process, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the right (S2505: No), the arrangement of the sorting rotator 741 has changed since the previous rotor position detection process. Therefore, the rotating body state signal (CN13) is set to the H output state (S2506), the rotating body flag 203j is turned on (S2507), and this process is terminated. The external device such as the hall computer 262 can grasp the state of the sorting rotator 741 based on the state of the rotator state signal (CN13), and thus determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sorting rotator 741 and whether or not an illegal act has occurred. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the power interruption signal output processing (S1817) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the occurrence of power interruption in the main processing (see FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the power interruption signal output processing (S1817). As described above, the power interruption signal output process is a process for setting a signal output from the external output terminal board 261 according to the gaming state when a power interruption occurs.

  In this power interruption signal output processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203g is on (S2601). If it is determined that it is on (S2601: Yes), the special gaming state signal (CN2) Is set to the H output state (S2602), and the process proceeds to S2603. If it is determined that the big hit flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S2601: No), the process of S2602 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2603.

  In the processing of S2603, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203e is on (S2603). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is on (S2603: Yes), the probability variation signal (CN3) is set to the H output state ( The process proceeds to S2604) and S2605. If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203e is not on (that is, is off) (S2603: No), the process of S2604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2605.

  In the processing of S2605, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S2605), and if it is determined that the value is 1 or more (S2605: Yes), the time reduction signal (CN4) is output as H. (S2606), and the process proceeds to S2607. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S2605: No), the process of S2606 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2607.

  In the processing of S2607, it is determined whether or not the changing flag 203h is on (S2607). If it is determined that it is on (S2607: Yes), the symbol variation signal (CN5) is set to the H output state. (S2608), and the process proceeds to S2609. If it is determined that the value of the changing flag 203h is not on (that is, off) (S2607: No), the process of S2608 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2609.

  In the processing of S2609, it is determined whether or not the rotator flag 203j is on (S2609). If it is determined that the rotator flag 203j is on (S2609: Yes), the rotator signal (CN6) is set to the H output state. (S2610), and the process proceeds to S2611. If it is determined that the value of the rotating body flag 203j is not on (that is, it is off) (S2609: No), the process of S2610 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2611.

  In the process of S2611, the signal output states of CN2 to CN6 are detected, and it is determined whether or not there is a channel that is in the H output state (whether there is an external output signal that is being output) (S2611). ). If it is determined by the processing of S2611 that there is a channel that is in the H output state (S2611: Yes), it is determined whether 0.1 second has elapsed since the H output state was set (S2612), If the elapsed time is less than 0.1 second (S2612: No), the process proceeds to S2612 again, and the process of S2612 is repeated until 0.1 second elapses.

  If it is determined by the processing of S2612 that 0.1 second has elapsed (S2612: Yes), among the channels CN2 to CN6, the output of the channel that is in the H output state is set to the L output state. The setting is made (S2613), and the process proceeds to S2614. If it is determined in the process of S2611 that all of CN2 to CN6 are in the L output state (S2611: No), the processes of S2612, S2613 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2614.

  In the process of S2614, the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the H output state (S2614), and it is determined whether 0.1 second has elapsed (S2615). In the process of S2615, when it is determined that the elapsed time is less than 0.1 second (S2615: No), the process is transferred again to S2615, and the process of S2615 is repeated until 0.1 second elapses. If it is determined by the process of S2615 that 0.1 second has elapsed (S2615: Yes), the notification end signal (CN8) is set to the L output state (S2616), and this process ends. The hall computer 262 determines that the notification of the gaming state based on the power interruption has been completed based on receiving from the CN 8 a signal whose output period of H output is 0.1 second, and is output from other than the CN 1 thereafter. Is set so that the gaming state at the time of power interruption (information stored in the information storage area 273a11 at the time of power interruption) is not overwritten.

  Note that the processing (S2612, S2615) for holding the external output signal that has started output in the H output state for 0.1 second is not necessarily performed in this processing. For example, the power interruption signal output process (see FIG. 55) may be configured to perform a process of setting each external output signal to the H output state. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 47), after S1819 ends, the signal output period may be determined to determine whether or not to set the L output state.

<Regarding the Control Process of the Payment Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the payout control apparatus 111. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In this startup process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2701). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Next, it waits for the receipt of a payout permission command transmitted from main controller 110 (S2702: No). When a payout permission command is received (S2702: Yes), RAM access is permitted (S2703) and an external interrupt vector is set (S2704).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S2705). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S2705: Yes), the processing is performed to clear (erase) the backup data in S2715. Migrate to On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2705: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area of the RAM 213 (S2706), and if not stored (S2706). : No), since the backup data is not stored, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S4315. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area (S2706: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2707), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2708: No), that is, calculated. If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S2715. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the processing after S2715, initialization processing of the RAM 213 is executed. In this initialization process, first, the used area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S2715), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S2716). Thereafter, the MPU 211 peripheral device is initialized (S2717), an interrupt is permitted (S2718), and the process proceeds to a payout control process described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not pressed (S2705: No), the occurrence information of the power shutdown is set (S2706: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S2708: Yes), processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power-off restoration) is executed. That is, the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown is restored (S2709), and the information on occurrence of power shutdown is cleared (S2710). Also, the MPU 211 peripheral device is initialized (S2711), and the used register is restored from the backup area of the RAM 213 (S2712). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the interrupt has been permitted before the power is turned off (S2713). If the interrupt is in the permitted state (S2713: Yes), the interrupt is permitted (S2714), and the process is interrupted. Return to the previous address (address pointed to by the stack pointer). On the other hand, if the interrupt is prohibited when the power is turned off (S2713: No), the processing is returned to the address (address indicated by the stack pointer) before the power is turned off while the interrupt is prohibited.

  Next, the payout control process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This payout control process is executed subsequent to the start-up process (see FIG. 56) of the payout control device 111, and is a process for setting a payout of winning balls or balls. In this payout control process, first, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2801). If it is determined that a prize ball command has been received (S2801: Yes), The value of the prize ball counter 213a is updated based on the notified prize ball number (S2802). The payout control device 111 pays out the number of prize balls according to the value of the prize ball number counter 213a.

  When the processing of S2802 is completed, next, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 112 (S2803). Then, the state of the state return switch is checked, and if the state return switch is pressed, a state return operation is executed (S2804). Here, the state return switch is a switch for causing the payout motor 216 to perform a state return operation when pressed by a hall clerk or the like when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs. Specifically, when the state return switch is pressed, as a state return operation, the payout motor 216 rotates in the opposite direction to normal, so that the ball clogging is eliminated (that is, the normal state is restored). It is configured.

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the lower pan unit 15 (S2805). That is, the full state of the lower plate unit 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set, and the lower plate is not full. Occasionally, the lower pan full tank release state is set. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change of the tank ball state (S2806). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and if there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S2807).

  Next, a process for paying out a prize ball is executed by each process of S2808 to S2810. That is, if the prize ball is not paid out and the value of the prize ball counter 213a updated in the process of S2802 is not 0 (S2808: No, S2809: No), the prize ball control process is started (S2810). ). On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S2808: Yes), or if the value of the prize ball number counter 213a is 0 (S2809: Yes), the process proceeds to a process for paying out a rental ball. Details of the prize ball control process (S2808) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing for paying out the lent balls in S2811 to S2813, if the rented ball cannot be paid out and a rented ball payout request is received from the card unit (S2811: No, S2812: Yes) The ball control process (S2813) is started. On the other hand, if it is in a state in which the rental ball cannot be paid out (S2811: Yes) or if a rental ball payout request has not been received (S2812: No), the process proceeds to S2814. Details of the lending control process (S2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2813, the state return switch is checked, and the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the ball removal disabled state and the ball removal operation are not started (S2814). Next, on the condition that the ball is clogged, control of the vibrator provided on the tank rail (vibrating motor control) is executed (S2815). Specifically, when ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail, vibration is applied to the tank rail by driving the vibrator to eliminate the ball clogging. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout control process, and thereafter the processes of S2801 to S2815 described above are repeatedly executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the above-described prize ball control process (S2810) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this prize ball control process. In this award ball control process, first, the payout motor 216 is driven so as to pay out one prize ball (S2901). Next, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S2902). Whether or not the ball is counted normally is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch (S2903). If it is determined that the game ball count is normal (S2903: Yes), the process proceeds to S2905.

  When it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is not normal in the process of S2902 (S2902: No), or when it is determined that the count of the game balls is not normal in the process of S2903 (S2903: No), The motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S2910). This process is terminated and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 57).

  In the process of S2904 executed after the process of S2903, 1 is added to the value of the payout counter 213b (S2904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter 213b after the addition is 10 (S2905). If it is determined by the processing of S2905 that the value of the payout counter 213b is 10 (S2905: Yes), further from the payout of the winning ball that triggered the previous payout signal (CN9) to be in the H output state. This means that 10 prize balls have been paid out. Accordingly, the payout signal (CN9) is set to be in the H output state for 0.2 seconds (S2906), the value of the payout counter 213b is cleared to 0 (S2907), and the process proceeds to S2908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2905 that the value of the payout counter 213b is less than 10 (S2905: No), the processes of S2906 and S2907 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2908.

  Through the processing of S2905 to S2907, the payout signal (CN9) can be set to the H output state every time 10 winning balls are paid out. Therefore, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can grasp the total number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 10 based on the payout signal (CN9). Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the ball exit rate, the hall sales, and the like. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal operation or an illegal act regarding the payout of the prize ball.

  In the process of S2908 executed after the process of S2905 or S2907, whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls (that is, the payout of the prize ball instructed by the prize ball command is made). (S2908). If the payout has been completed (S2908: Yes), the payout motor 216 is stopped (S2909), this process is terminated, and the payout control process (FIG. 57). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2908 that the payout of the winning ball has not been completed (S2908: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 57).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the above-described ball rental control process (S2813) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this ball lending control process (S2813). In the ball lending control process, first, the payout motor 216 is driven to execute lending of a lending ball (S3001). Next, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S3002). If it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S3002: Yes), the game ball count Whether or not is normally performed is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch (S3003). If it is determined that the game ball count is normal (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004.

  Further, when it is determined in the process of S3002 that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is not normal (S3002: No), and when it is determined that the count of the game balls is not normal in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), payout The motor 216 is driven to execute a retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S3006). This process is terminated and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 57).

  In the process of S3004 executed after the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is completed (S3004). If completed (S3004: Yes), a stop process of the payout motor 216 is executed (S3005), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3004, when it is determined that the predetermined number of lent balls (25) has not been paid out (S3005: No), this process is ended as it is.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S3218 is performed in this start-up process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 61). ) Is determined during execution (S3102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3215 in FIG. 61), it executes a power-off process in S3218. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3218 is in the middle of execution can be determined based on the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S3102: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S3218. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3103: Yes), the process proceeds to S3104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3103: No), the process proceeds to S3108.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3104. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S3118, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3103: No), and the process proceeds to S3108.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S3102: Yes), the current ramp-up process is performed after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process in S1316, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3104). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S3108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S3218 is executed (see S3217 in FIG. 61). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3218 is executed, the startup process of this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S3218 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S3108: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3110), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S3111), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S3108 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S3108 is performed via the processes of S3104 to S3106. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3108: No), S3109, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S3110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3110), and interrupt permission is set. In step S3111, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S3109 is that when the process from S3104 to S3108 is reached via the process of S3106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3104. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S3201). If not (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3211 without performing the processes in S3202 to S3210. In step S3201, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not in steps S3202 to S3210, which are mainly related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3211 and the variable display setting process of S3212 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S3211 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S3212 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S3201 (S3201: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S3203 to S3212 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S3202). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3208 described later are set (S3203), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3204). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3205 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S3205, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S3206). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S3207). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S3208), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S3209). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3209, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3210), and the process proceeds to S3211. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S3208 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S3209 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3211, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S3211). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination process (S3211) is finished, the variable display setting process is executed (S3212). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S3212 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3213). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3213 (S3213: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S3215), and the power interruption processing is executed (S3216). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3217), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S3213 (S3213: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3214), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3214: No), the process returns to S3201, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3214: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent process. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3211). This command determination processing (S3211) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S3301). When the variation pattern command is received (S3301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3302), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the ROM 222 (S3303), and the main processing Return to. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 63) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a loop mode mode are provided as modes of the variation pattern effect. Whether to select the normal mode or the loop state mode is determined based on the type of command output in the previous jackpot. That is, when the normal state command is output in the previous jackpot (see S2410 in FIG. 53), the normal mode is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a until the next jackpot. Even when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, the normal mode is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a until the next big hit. On the other hand, when a loop status command is output in the previous jackpot (see S2409 in FIG. 53), a special mode for the loop status is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a until the next jackpot. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous by executing the variation pattern effect in a mode different from the normal mode (a mode for the loop state). It is possible to suppress quitting the game without noticing the advantageous state despite being in a loop state that is advantageous to the user.

  It should be noted that during the loop state, the variation pattern type selected during the normal state may not be selected at all, and a variation pattern effect mode selected in common between the normal state and the loop state is provided. May be. Whether or not the player is currently in the loop state by performing the variation pattern effect only once by configuring the variation pattern effect in a completely different manner to be selected in the normal state and the loop state. Can be judged. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the quitting of the game without noticing that it is in the loop state despite being in the loop state. On the other hand, if a variation pattern production mode selected in common is provided, even if a variation pattern production mode selected in common is selected, the player feels that the possibility of a loop state remains. Can be made. Therefore, since the expectation whether the present state is the normal state or the loop state can be maintained for a long time, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S3301: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3304). When the stop type command is received (S3304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3306). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 63) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S3304: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3307). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S3307: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3308). In the process of S3308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S3308 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter of the main control device 110 by the process of S3308. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S3308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S3307, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S3307: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3309). When the opening command is received (S3309: Yes), a display opening command for executing an opening effect for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the jackpot is set (S3310). End and return to the main process.

  If the opening command has not been received in the processing of S3309 (S3308: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3311). When the round number command is received (S3311: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3312), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S3313), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3202) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command is not received in the processing of S3311 (S3311: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command is received from the main controller 110 (S3314). When an ending command is received (S3314: Yes), a display ending command is set for causing the display control device 114 to execute an ending effect for informing the end of jackpot (S3315). End and return to the main process.

  If it is determined in step S3314 that an ending command has not been received (S3314: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received result is executed. (S3316), this process is terminated. For example, when a winning information command is received as another command, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command, and the extracted winning information (win / no-go, stop) (Type, variation pattern) is stored in the first area of the vacant information storage area 223a vacant area (first area to fourth area), and the process returns to the main process. In addition, if another command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the variable display setting process (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S3212). This variable display setting process (S3212) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3401: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S3406. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S3402), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S3303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 62). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3403).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3404). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3405). In the process of S3405, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3406.

  In the process of S3406, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3406). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3406: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3406: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3407), and then in the process of S3305 of the command determination process (see FIG. 62), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3408).

  Next, the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3409), and the display stop for notifying the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. A type command is generated and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S3410), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Processing of Hall Computer in First Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 64, the main process executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10, data corresponding to the game situation of each pachinko machine 10 is updated, and whether each pachinko machine 10 is abnormal or illegal is determined. To do.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is first executed (S3501). Next, a signal reception process for executing a process according to the signal received from the pachinko machine 10 is performed (S3502), and then a display update process for updating the display of the display device 274 provided in the hall computer 262 is executed. (S3503). Then, it is determined whether or not the operator of the hall computer 262 has performed an operation on the operating means of the hall computer, and if there is an operation, an operating means input monitoring process is executed to execute processing corresponding to the operation (S3504). ).

  Next, when power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the previous power-off and the gaming state at the current power-on are compared to determine whether there is an abnormality. Processing is executed (S3505). Then, it is determined whether there is power-off occurrence information (S3506). If there is power-off occurrence information, a power-off process is executed (S3508), and thereafter, the power is completely shut down and the process is executed. Continue infinite loop until you can't.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3506 that the information on occurrence of power interruption has not been stored, it is then determined whether or not the hard disk 273 is destroyed (S3507). If the hard disk 273 is not destroyed (S3507: No), it returns to the process of S3502, and the process of S3502-S3505 is repeatedly performed. On the other hand, if the hard disk 273 is destroyed (S3507: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the hard disk 273 is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter the display on the display device 274 does not change. Therefore, since the operator of the hall computer 262 can know that an abnormality has occurred, it can be repaired.

  Next, the signal reception process (S3502), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 64), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this signal reception process (S3502), processes corresponding to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 are executed.

  In the signal reception process, first, it is determined whether or not an external output signal (various signals in the H output state) has been received from the CN2 to CN14 of the pachinko machine 10, and if the external output signal has not been received, the present process is continued. And the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 64).

  If it is determined in step S3601 that an external output signal has been received, it is then determined whether the power-on signal (CN1) of the pachinko machine 10 to which the external output signal has been output is in the H output state ( S3502). If it is determined that the power-on signal (CN1) is not H output (that is, L output) (S3502: No), it indicates the gaming state that is output when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Since this means that the signal (see FIG. 23) has been received, the information in the power interruption information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is updated (S3603). For example, if it is determined that the probability variation signal (CN3) and the symbol variation signal (CN5) of the first pachinko machine 10 are in the H output state and the other external output signals are in the L output state, Information indicating that the gaming state at the time of power-off is in the high probability state of the special symbol and that the symbol is changing is stored in the power-off information storage area 273a11 of the one data storage area 273a. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 that has received the external output signal is specified by the individual identification information output from the island management device 264 and the information on the connection terminal.

  When the processing of S3603 ends, the startup flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal (for example, the startup flag 273a13 of the first data storage area 273a for the first pachinko machine 10) is turned off. Set and finish this process.

  In the process of S3602, if it is determined that the power-on signal (CN1) is in the H output state (S3602: Yes), then a data storage area startup flag (corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal) ( For example, if it is the first pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal, it is determined whether or not the startup flag 273a13) of the first data storage area 273a is on (S3605). As a result of the determination in S3605, if it is determined that the start-up flag is OFF (S3605: No), the pachinko machine 10 sends a signal corresponding to the gaming state to the external device at the start-up based on power-on. Means output. Therefore, in this case, the data in the power recovery time information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is updated according to the external output signal (S3606). For example, if it is determined that the probability variation signal (CN3) and the symbol variation signal (CN5) of the first pachinko machine 10 are in the H output state and the other external output signals are in the L output state, In the power recovery information storage area 273a11 of one data storage area 273a, information indicating that the gaming state at the time of power-off is in a high probability state of a special symbol and that the symbol is changing is stored. Note that when the process of S3606 ends, this process ends.

  In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the data storage area startup flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is ON (S3605: Yes), the signal corresponding to the game situation is normal. (Refer to FIG. 22), the data in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is updated based on the external output signal received this time (S3607). For example, when it is detected that the payout signal (CN9) of the first pachinko machine 10 is in the H output state and the H output state has continued for 0.2 seconds, the pachinko machine 10 newly adds 10 balls. Since it means that the winning ball has been paid out, 10 is added to the value of the paying ball number counter 273a8 in the first data storage area 273a.

  When the process of S3607 is completed, the display content of the display device 274 is then updated based on the data updated by the process of S3607 (S3608), and the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal by the processes of S3609 to S3613. After determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred, the present process is terminated.

  In the process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality, it is first determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the big hit signal (CN12) (S3609), and if it is determined that a big hit is made (S3609: Yes) ), This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3609, when it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S3609: No), based on the state of the first large opening operation signal (CN3) and the second large opening operation signal (CN4), It is determined whether one of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open (S3610).

  In the process of S3610, when it is determined that either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened (S3610: Yes), even though it is not a big hit, it means that it is in a state where a lot of prize balls can be obtained by winning game balls to the open big opening, which means that it is in an abnormal state . Therefore, in this case, an abnormality of the large opening is set to be displayed on the display device 274 (S3611), and the process proceeds to S3612. In the process of S3610, when it is determined that both the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are closed (S3610: No), the process of S3611 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3612.

  In the processing of S3612, it is determined whether or not the state of the distribution rotating body 741 has changed based on the state of the rotating body state signal (CN13) (S3612). This means that the rotating body 741 is in an abnormal state in which it is displaced, so that the abnormality of the sorting rotating body 741 is displayed on the display device 274 (S3613), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3612 that the sorting rotator 741 is not displaced (S3612: No), this process is terminated.

  Next, the power recovery comparison process (S3505) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This power recovery comparison process (S3505) is one of the main processes executed by the control device 272, and when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the gaming state at the previous power interruption Is compared with the gaming state at the time of power-on this time to determine whether or not there is an abnormality.

  In the power recovery comparison process, first, it is determined whether or not the power-on signal (CN1) is in the H output state (S3701), and is determined not to be in the H output state (that is, in the L output state). If this is the case (S3701: No), it means that the power to the pachinko machine 10 is not turned on (that is, it is not a start-up timing), so this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3701, when it is determined that the power-on signal (CN1) is in the H output state (S3701: Yes), the startup flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 in which the power-on signal is determined to be the H output is then displayed. It is determined whether or not it is on (S3702). If it is determined in step S3702 that the start-up flag is on (S3702: Yes), this indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has already shifted to the normal state, and thus the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3702 that the start flag is not on, it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the RAM initialization signal (CN7) is in the H output state for 0.1 second ( S3703). If it is determined that the RAM initialization signal is in the H output state for 0.1 seconds (S3703), the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed to turn on the power, and the gaming state at the previous power interruption Since there is no point in comparing the gaming state at the time of power-on this time, the processing of S3704 to S3710 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3711.

  If it is determined in the process of S3703 that the RAM initialization signal has not detected the H output state (S3703: No), it is detected that the notification end signal (CN8) is in the H output state for 0.1 second. (S3704), and if it is determined that the notification end signal of the H output state has not been received (S3704: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the notification end signal of the H output state has been received (S3704: Yes), it indicates that the output of the information regarding the gaming state from the pachinko machine 10 has been completed based on power-on, so the previous power The information on the gaming state stored in the power interruption information storage area at the time of disconnection is compared with the information on the gaming state stored in the power recovery information storage area at the start of this time (S3705). Is discriminated (S3706).

  If it is determined by the processing of S3705 that the information stored in the power interruption information storage area and the information stored in the power recovery information storage area do not match (S3706: No), Since it indicates that the gaming state has changed, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or that an illegal act has been performed. Therefore, in such a case, abnormality notification is set (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3706 that the information stored in the power interruption information storage area matches the information stored in the power recovery information storage area (S3706: Yes), then the pachinko machine 10 Is determined to be a jackpot (S3707), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S3707: Yes), it is then determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol. (S3708). When it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 is read from the hard disk 273, and it is determined whether or not the player has entered the short time entrance 501 at the time of the previous big hit ( S3709).

  In the process of S3709, if it is determined that the player has entered the short-time entrance 501 at the time of the previous big hit (S3709: Yes), the game has shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit is over. This means that the current state is a high probability state of a special symbol, so that there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred or an illegal act has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in such a case, the display device 274 is set to notify the occurrence of an abnormality (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3709, if it is determined that the previous entrance is not the short-time entrance 501 (that is, any of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504), the process proceeds to S3711. . Further, when it is determined in the process of S3707 that the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (S3707: Yes), in the process of S3708, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state of the special symbol (S3708: No) In the same manner, the process proceeds to S3711.

  In the process of S3711, in order to be able to accept a normal signal (see FIG. 22) from the pachinko machine 10, the start flag of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is set to ON, and this process ends. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to be able to output various signals to an external device such as the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal plate 261. Further, CN1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is configured to switch between the H output state and the L output state in conjunction with the power supply state of the pachinko machine 10, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is based on the output state of the CN1. It can be determined whether or not is inserted.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the mode of the signal output from each output channel of the external output terminal plate 261 is configured to be changeable, and configured to output a different signal depending on the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Specifically, in a normal gaming state (from the start of the pachinko machine 10 to the end of detecting power-off), it is configured to output information according to the gaming situation of the pachinko machine 10, An external device such as the hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp a real-time situation based on information output from the pachinko machine 10. For example, when a payout signal is output from the pachinko machine 10, it means that 10 additional prize balls have been paid out from the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the hall computer 262, the number of payout balls of the pachinko machine 10 is paid out. By updating the information, it is possible to always grasp the latest payout number. In this way, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 so that information corresponding to the game situation can be output, the latest situation of the pachinko machine 10 and the game history can be grasped by an external device such as the hall computer 262. . Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the ball exit rate, the operation rate, the sales of the entire hall, the presence / absence of abnormality, etc. of each pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, information indicating a gaming state (information indicating whether or not a special symbol is in a high probability state, whether or not a big hit state is present when the power is turned on and when a power interruption occurs. Or the like) is output. Based on these signals, an external device such as a hall computer can determine whether or not the state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, it is determined whether the gaming state has changed between when the power is cut off and when the power is turned on next time. If the gaming state has changed, some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10. It can be judged that there is a possibility of being. Normally, the gaming state cannot be changed by simply turning the power on / off. Therefore, if the gaming state changes, the gaming state may be rewritten during a power interruption due to some fraud, or a pachinko machine during a power interruption. There is a possibility that a failure has occurred in the RAM 203 or the like. Therefore, in such a case, the occurrence of an abnormality can be notified, and the operator of the hall computer 262 can check the pachinko machine 10 where the abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality can be resolved.

  In this embodiment, since it is comprised so that the presence or absence of abnormality may be discriminate | determined every time power is supplied with respect to the pachinko machine 10, even if abnormality has arisen in the pachinko machine 10, a player is abnormal. Measures can be taken before the game is started by the pachinko machine 10 in the state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from damaging the player or conversely damaging the hall by playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 in an abnormal state. It should be noted that an external device such as the hall computer 262 can easily determine the timing at which the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the timing at which the power is turned on based on the output status of the CN 1 of the pachinko machine 10. it can.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to output a signal with an H output period of 0.1 second from each of the channels CN2 to CN8 when the power is turned on and when the power is cut off. The output period is not limited to 0.1 seconds. For example, the output period may be 0.05 seconds shorter than 0.1 seconds. Thereby, since the period required for the process at the time of power-on can be shortened, the occurrence of an abnormality can be notified more quickly and the abnormality can be resolved. In addition, since the output of the information indicating the gaming state can be completed in a shorter period from the occurrence of the power interruption, the gaming state can be reduced even if the time from the occurrence of the power interruption until the power is completely shut down is shortened. The output of the indicated information can be completed. That is, the capacity of the power storage means such as a capacitor that supplies power to the main control device 110 and the like after the occurrence of power interruption can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the cost of the power storage means.

  The present embodiment is configured such that when a signal output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261 is in an H output state for a predetermined period, it is determined that various signals are output by an external device such as the hall computer 262. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the L output state and the H output state may be reversed.

  Further, the output period of signals output from the respective channels CN2 to CN8 may be longer than 0.1 seconds. By extending the output period, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can more reliably detect the signal output from each channel, so whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. More accurate determination can be made.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to output the out sphere detection signal (CN2) every time 10 out spheres are detected, but it is not always necessary to output every 10 spheres. Can be determined. For example, an out-sphere detection signal may be output every five balls. When the out-ball detection signal is output every 10 balls, the number of out-balls cannot be ascertained. Therefore, the number of game balls actually entered into the out-port 66 and the hall computer 262 An error of 9 balls at maximum occurs between the number of out balls and Therefore, by configuring so that an out-ball detection signal is output every number smaller than 10 balls (for example, every 5 balls), the number of game balls actually entered into the out-port 66 and the hall computer 262 It is possible to reduce the error between the number of outballs grasped by. Further, the number of game balls that enter the out port 66 before outputting the out ball detection signal may be larger than 10 (for example, every 20 balls). As a result, the frequency of outputting the out-sphere detection signal is reduced, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. For the same reason, the winning detection signal does not necessarily need to be output every time ten winning balls are detected, and can be arbitrarily determined. Further, the payout signal does not necessarily need to be output every time a payout of 10 prize balls is detected, and can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the power-on signal is output from the CN 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be output from an arbitrary channel. For other channels, the correspondence between the channels and the output signals may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present embodiment, various signals output from the pachinko machine 10 are configured to be input to the hall computer 262 via the table management device 263, the island management device 264, and the relay device 265. It is not something that can be done. For example, a signal may be input directly from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 262. As a result, it is possible to prevent the signal output from the pachinko machine 10 from being altered in the process of passing through each external device and causing the hall computer 262 to store erroneous data. Further, some of the table management device 263, the island management device 264, and the relay device 265 may be omitted. For example, the island management device 264 may include the function of the relay device 265, and the relay device 265 may be omitted. Thereby, the capital investment amount of a hall | hole and an electricity bill can be reduced.

  Although the present embodiment is configured to output the signals having the contents shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the output signal is not necessarily limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 may be output to an external device. With this configuration, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can acquire information indicating whether or not a big hit is included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the variation period. Therefore, the result of the symbol variation can be determined during the symbol variation. As a result, for example, if a big hit is made after the change of the symbol is completed despite receiving the change pattern command indicating that the special symbol is off, it is possible that some fraudulent activity has been performed. Can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud and to prevent an unexpected disadvantage for the hall. Further, for example, the external output terminal plate 261 and the launch control device 112 may be electrically connected, and a signal indicating the number of game balls set for launch by the launch control device 112 may be output. As a result, the number of balls launched by the player can be compared with the number of game balls that have entered the out slot 66 and various winning holes. When an abnormality is detected such that the number of game balls that have entered the various winning openings is unnatural relative to the number of balls that have been launched, the abnormality of the hall computer 262 is notified. The pachinko machine 10 can be inspected. Therefore, fraudulent acts and malfunctions with respect to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected early.

  In this embodiment, a signal is output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261 in a parallel manner, but a signal may be output in a serial manner. For example, the output channels of the external output terminal plate 261 are three types CN1 to CN3, a power-on signal is output from CN1, signals corresponding to various signals are output from CN2, and output from CN2 is output from CN3. A signal (clock) indicating what kind of data is to be output may be output.

  This serial method will be described in detail, taking the case of power-on as an example. First, after CN1 rises to the H output state, it notifies the external device that it is a period for notifying whether CN3 is in a big hit state or not. If the gaming state is a big hit, CN2 is in the H output state, and if it is not in the big hit, CN2 is in the L output state. As a result, the external device can acquire information indicating whether or not the jackpot is being won. Next, the output of CN2 is stopped, and the external device is notified that it is a period for notifying whether CN3 is in a high probability state of a special symbol. If the gaming state is a special symbol high probability state, CN2 is set to an H output state, and if the gaming state is a special symbol low probability state, CN2 is set to an L output state. Thereby, the external device can acquire information on whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. Thereafter, the external device is also notified in order of whether or not it is in the time-short state, whether or not the symbol is changing, and whether or not the sorting rotator 741 is swung to the left. With this configuration, the number of output channels of the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced, so that the cost of the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced. Moreover, since the number of harnesses connecting the pachinko machine 10 to each external device and each external device can be reduced, the cost of peripheral equipment of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the signal output from the external output device 261 in the normal gaming state is limited to a signal (see FIG. 22) for notifying information according to the gaming situation. It is not limited. For example, when it is detected that the game is stopped (a state in which the player does not operate the handle 51 of the pachinko machine 10) or that a demonstration is being performed, information indicating the game state may be output. Good. In this case, information indicating the game state may be output periodically or irregularly until the game stop state or the state during the demonstration effect is canceled. The hall computer 262 may be configured to determine whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed by comparing with the previous reception result every time information indicating the gaming state is received. . If the game state changes while the game is stopped or during the demonstration production, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or an illegal act has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. By repeatedly confirming, it is possible to quickly detect and respond to abnormal operations and fraudulent acts.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 77, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the signal output from CN1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is changed in conjunction with the power supply state of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-on state, the CN1 is continuously set to the H output state. When the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the power is turned on next time. , CN1 continues to be set to the L output state. Based on the output state of CN1, an external device such as a hall computer quickly determines the presence or absence of an abnormality at the stage when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (that is, before the player starts the game). Was configured to be able to.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to output a signal indicating that the power is turned on and a signal indicating that the power supply is cut off from the CN 1. In addition, after outputting a signal indicating power-on or a signal indicating power-off, a part of the signal corresponding to the gaming state is output using CN1. Further, in a normal time, the CN 1 is configured to output a part of a signal corresponding to the game situation.

  In other words, a plurality of signals can be output from CN1 at different timings. Since each signal output from the CN 1 has a different output period, an external device that has received various signals from the pachinko machine 10 can easily display information indicated by each signal depending on the output period. It is possible to determine and execute processing according to the signal.

  Thus, by not using CN1 as a dedicated channel for the power-on signal, the number of channels can be reduced, so the number of parts of the external output terminal board 261 and the number of harnesses connecting the pachinko machine 10 and the external device are reduced. Can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 and its peripheral devices (external devices) can be reduced.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 41) and the start-up process (see FIG. 42) in the main controller 110. The partial processing included in the reference) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Moreover, the aspect of the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. In the second embodiment, a part of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 64) executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 is different from the hall computer 262 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 262 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69, modes of signals output from each output channel of the external output terminal plate 261 in the second embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 67, each channel (each output pin) provided on external output terminal board 261 in a normal gaming state (from the start of pachinko machine 10 to when power-off is detected). The types of signals output from will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the number of channels of the external output terminal plate 261 in the second embodiment is 13 channels, which is one channel less than the number of channels (14 channels) of the external output terminal plate 261 in the first embodiment. ing. Further, the power-on signal output from CN1 in the first embodiment is abolished in the second embodiment. Further, in the second embodiment, the output signals output from CN2 to CN14 in the first embodiment are output from CN1 to CN13, respectively. In other words, in the second embodiment, the number of channels is reduced by one by the amount corresponding to the abolition of the power-on signal. In addition, the content of the signal output from each channel of CN1-CN13 in 2nd Embodiment is the same as the content of the signal output from each channel of CN2-CN14 in 1st Embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the types of signals output from the external output terminal plate 261 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is started up and when a power failure is detected will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the contents of signals output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the external output terminal board 261 in the second embodiment is configured to output information indicating the gaming state using the seven channels CN1 to CN7. Of these seven channels, CN1 is configured to be able to output a plurality of types of signals. Specifically, the CN 1 sends a signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on when power-on is detected, and the power-off to the external device when the power is cut off. The notification signal and the special gaming state signal output from the CN 2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are configured to be output.

  Since the three types of signals have different output periods, the external device discriminates the output period, so that any one of the three types of signals output from the CN1 of the pachinko machine 10 is output. Can be identified. Specifically, the signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on is set such that the H output period is set to 0.5 seconds, and the signal for notifying the external device of the power-off is: The H output period is set to 0.3 seconds. In addition, as described above in the description of the first embodiment, the special game state signal is set such that the H output period is 0.1 second. The special gaming state signal in this embodiment is an external signal after the output of the signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on or the signal for notifying the external device of the power-off is completed. Output to the device.

  Further, the same signals as the signals output from the channels CN3 to CN8 in the first embodiment are output from the channels CN2 to CN7, respectively. In this embodiment, the signal output from each of the channels CN2 to CN7 is a signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on or a signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned off. Is output to the external device after the output of.

  In this way, when the power is turned on and when a power interruption occurs, a signal whose output period is different from that of other signals is output, so that a different signal is output when the power is turned on and when a power interruption occurs. Therefore, the number of channels of the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts of the external output terminal board 261 and the number of harnesses connecting the external output terminal board 261 and the external device can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 and its peripheral devices can be reduced. it can.

  Next, with reference to a time chart of FIG. 69, a specific example of a mode of a signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, first, CN1 is in an H output state for 0.5 seconds in order to notify the external device that the power has been turned on. . When the H output is output from CN 1 for 0.5 seconds, the external device can grasp that the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  When 0.5 second elapses after CN1 becomes H output, CN1 falls to L output. Then, after a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has elapsed, a signal indicating a gaming state is output. In the example of FIG. 69, a special gaming state signal indicating that the gaming state is a big hit state is output (CN1 is in an H output state for 0.1 second). When the output period (0.1 second) of the signal indicating the gaming state (special gaming state signal in the example of FIG. 69) has elapsed, the signal indicating the gaming state is set to the L output state and the notification end signal (CN7) is output. This notification end signal notifies the external device that the output of the signal indicating the gaming state has ended. When the external device such as the hall computer receives this notification end signal, it compares the gaming state specified by the signal indicating the gaming state output this time with the gaming state at the time of the previous power-off, and the pachinko machine 10 Determine if there is any abnormality or fraud.

  When the output of the notification end signal is completed, a period for waiting until the sub-side control device becomes operable is set by the wait process (see S1313 in FIG. 73) in the start-up process. Is also stopped. After the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 73) is completed, information (see FIG. 67) corresponding to the game situation is output from each channel of the external output terminal board 261. An external device such as the hall computer 262 can grasp the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 in real time based on information (information indicating the number of out balls, prize balls, etc.) output from the external output terminal version 261. it can. As a result, it is possible to accurately manage the payout rate and operating status of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of abnormality or fraud.

  In addition, when the power-off of the pachinko machine 10 is detected, CN1 is in the H output state for 0.3 seconds in order to notify the external device that the power-off has occurred. By outputting H from CN1 for 0.3 seconds, the external device can grasp that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  When 0.3 seconds elapses after CN1 enters the H output state, CN1 falls to the L output state. Then, after a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has elapsed, a signal indicating a gaming state is output. In the example of FIG. 69, a special gaming state signal indicating that the gaming state is a big hit state is output (CN1 is in an H output state for 0.1 second). When the output period (0.1 second) of the signal indicating the gaming state (special gaming state signal in the example of FIG. 69) has elapsed, the signal indicating the gaming state is set to the L output state and the notification end signal (CN7) is output. This notification end signal notifies the external device that the output of the signal indicating the gaming state has ended. An external device such as a hall computer stores information indicating the gaming state notified until the notification end signal is output in the hard disk 273 and uses it to determine whether there is an abnormality at the next power-on. Control is performed so that information stored in the hard disk 273 is not overwritten until the next power-on. That is, even if an H output signal is received from any channel of the external output terminal board 261 after receiving the notification end signal, overwriting of information based on the signal is prohibited. As a result, even if it is determined that the signal has been altered due to the influence of noise or the like and that an H output signal has been output, it is possible to prevent data from being overwritten based on the abnormal data. And the presence or absence of cheating.

<About the electrical configuration of the hall computer in the second embodiment>
Next, the first data storage area 273a that is also received by the hard disk 273 of the hall computer 262 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 70, the first data storage area 273a in the second embodiment is provided with a power-on flag 273a14 and a status notification flag 273a15 in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment.

  The power-on flag 273a14 is a flag that indicates whether the first pachinko machine 10 is powered on. If the power-on flag 273a14 is on, it indicates that the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and if it is off, it indicates that the power-off is detected. When the hall computer 262 receives an external output signal, the hall computer 262 selects a storage area for storing data corresponding to the external output signal based on the power-on flag 273a14.

  The state notification flag 273a15 is a flag indicating whether or not the reception of information indicating the gaming state has been completed when the first pachinko machine 10 is powered on or after a power failure has occurred. If this state notification flag 273a15 is on, it indicates that the reception of information indicating the gaming state has been completed, and if it is off, it indicates that reception of information indicating the gaming state has not been completed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing of main controller 110.

  Of the NMI interrupt processing of the main control device 110, in the processing of S1201, the same processing as the processing of S1201 of the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 41) of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment is executed. In the main process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1201 is completed, a power-off notification process is executed (S1211), and this process is terminated. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, the power-off notification process (S1211) is a process for notifying an external device that a power-off has been detected.

  Next, the power-off notification process (S1211) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this power-off notification process, first, the output of CN1 of the external output terminal board 261 is set to the H output state (S3801). Then, the process is looped until 0.3 seconds have elapsed since the setting of H output (S3802: No). If it is determined that 0.3 seconds have elapsed (S3802: Yes), CN1 is output as L output. Set to state. Then, the process loops until 0.2 seconds elapse after setting to the L output state (S3804: No). If it is determined that 0.2 seconds elapses (S3804: Yes), this process is performed. End and return to the main process (see FIG. 71).

  By this power-off notification process, CN1 can be set to the H output state for 0.3 seconds. In this way, by outputting a signal with an output period different from the output period of other signals (0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, etc.), an external device such as the hall computer 262 can be easily powered by the pachinko machine 10. It can be determined that a disconnection has been detected. In addition, after an output period of 0.3 seconds elapses, an H output state can be set for 0.2 seconds. Thus, by setting the L output period of 0.2 seconds, it is possible to easily distinguish a signal indicating power-on from a signal output thereafter.

  Further, the output period (0.3 seconds) of the signal output when the power is turned off is configured to be shorter than the output period (0.5 seconds) of the signal output when the power is turned on. As a result, after the power-off is detected and before the power is completely shut off (before the power stored in the power storage means such as a capacitor is used up), the occurrence of the power-off is notified. Thus, the output of the information indicating the gaming state can also be completed.

  In the present embodiment, the output period of the signal output when the power is turned off is set to 0.3 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output period of a signal output when the power is turned off may be shorter (for example, 0.05 seconds) than other signals. As a result, even when the period from when the power is cut off to when the power is completely cut off is shortened, the information indicating the gaming state can be output. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the power storage means for supplying power after the power interruption occurs. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, the output period of the signal output when the power interruption is detected may be longer than that of other signals (for example, 0.7 seconds). Accordingly, processing for detecting an output period of a signal by an external device such as the hall computer 262 can be performed at a relatively long time interval. Therefore, the processing load on the external device can be reduced.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  Among the startup processes, the processes of S1301 and S1303 to S1319 execute the same processes as the processes of S1301 and S1303 to S1319 of the startup process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, respectively. . In the start-up process in the second embodiment, when the initial setting process (S1301) associated with power-on is completed, the pachinko machine 10 is then notified to the external device that the power is turned on. A power-on notification process is executed (S1321), and the process proceeds to S1303.

  Next, the above power-on notification process (S1321) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this power-on notification process, first, the output of CN1 of the external output terminal board 261 is set to the H output state (S3901). Then, the process is looped until 0.5 seconds elapse after setting the H output (S3902: No), and when it is determined that 0.5 seconds elapses (S3902: Yes), CN1 is output to L Set to state. Then, the process loops until 0.2 seconds elapse after setting to the L output state (S3904: No), and when it is determined that 0.2 seconds elapses (S3904: Yes), this process is performed. End and return to the start-up process (see FIG. 73).

  With this power-on notification process, CN1 can be set to the H output state for 0.5 seconds. In this way, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can easily output to the pachinko machine 10 by outputting a signal having an output period different from the output period of other signals (0.1 second, 0.2 second, etc.). It can be determined that the power is turned on. Further, after an output period of 0.5 seconds elapses, an H output state can be set for 0.2 seconds. Thus, by setting the L output period of 0.2 seconds, it is possible to easily distinguish a signal indicating power-on from a signal output thereafter.

<Regarding Control Processing of Hall Computer in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, each main control process executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the main process executed by the control device 272 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Of these main processes, the same processes as S3501 and S3503 to S3508 of the main process (see FIG. 64) in the first embodiment are executed in the processes of S3501 and S3503 to S3508, respectively. In the main process in the second embodiment, when the initial setting process (S3501) associated with power-on is completed, a flag setting process for updating various flags in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is then executed. Then (S3511), the signal reception process 2 for executing the process according to the signal received from the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3503. Details of these flag setting processing (S3511) and signal reception processing 2 (S3512) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

  Next, the flag setting process (S3511) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This flag setting process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 75) executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in the second embodiment, and various types of data storage areas according to the pachinko machine 10. This is a process for updating the flag.

  In the flag setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a signal indicating power-on has been received (S4001). Note that the signal indicating that the power is turned on indicates an H output signal for 0.5 seconds output from CN1 of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. If it is determined in step S4001 that a signal indicating power-on has been received (S4001: Yes), the power-on flag of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that output the signal indicating power-on is turned on. And the status notification flag is set to OFF (S4002), and this process ends. For example, in the case of the first pachinko machine 10, the power-on flag 273a14 of the first data storage area 273a is set on, and the state notification flag 273a15 is set off.

  By setting the power-on flag 273a14 to ON, it can be determined that the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and by setting the state notification flag 273a15 to OFF, the pachinko machine 10 is output when the power is turned on. It can be determined that reception of information indicating the gaming state is incomplete. Therefore, the type of signal output from the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that a signal indicating power-on has not been received (S4001: No), it is then determined whether a signal indicating occurrence of power-off has been received from CN1 (S4003). . Note that the signal indicating the occurrence of power interruption refers to the 0.3 second H output signal output from CN1 of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. In the process of S4003, if it is determined that a signal indicating the occurrence of power interruption has been received (S4003: Yes), the power-on flag of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the signal indicating the occurrence of power interruption Then, the status notification flag is set to OFF (S4004), and this process ends. For example, in the case of the first pachinko machine 10, the power-on flag 273a14 and the state notification flag 273a15 in the first data storage area 273a are set to ON.

  By setting the power-on flag 273a14 to OFF, it can be determined that the power-off has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and by setting the state notification flag 273a15 to OFF, the pachinko machine 10 is output when the power-off occurs. It can be determined that reception of information indicating the gaming state is incomplete. Therefore, the type of signal output from the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped.

  In the process of S4003, if it is determined that a signal indicating the occurrence of power interruption has not been received (S4003: No), then a notification end signal has been received (H output with an output period of 0.1 second from CN7) (S4005). If it is determined that the notification end signal has not been received (S4005: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S4005, when it is determined that the notification end signal has been received (the H output signal having an output period of 0.1 seconds from CN7) (S4005: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 that has output the state notification signal is notified. The status notification flag of the corresponding data storage area is set to ON (S4006). For example, in the case of the first pachinko machine 10, the status notification flag 273a15 of the first data storage area 273a is set to ON. This indicates that the reception of the information indicating the gaming state from the pachinko machine 10 has been completed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power-on flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the notification end signal is on (S4007). If it is determined that the power-on flag is on (S4007: Yes), this processing is performed as it is. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4007 that the power-on flag is not on (ie, off) (S4007: No), the start-up flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the notification end signal is turned off. (S4008), and this process ends.

  Here, when the notification end signal is received in a state where the power-on flag is off, it indicates that the reception of the signal indicating the gaming state output from the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the occurrence of the power-off is completed. Therefore, by setting the start-up flag to OFF in the process of S4008, it is possible to determine that the signal indicating the gaming state has not been received at the next power-on.

  Next, the signal reception process 2 (S3512) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This signal reception process 2 is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 75) executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in the second embodiment, and the signal reception process (FIG. 75) in the first embodiment. 65), a process for executing a process according to the signal received from the pachinko machine 10.

  Of the signal reception process 2 (S3512), the processes of S3601 and S3605 to S3613 are the same as the processes of S3601 and S3605 to S3613 of the signal reception process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed. In the signal reception process 2 (S3512) of this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S3601 that an external output signal is received from the pachinko machine 10 (an H output signal is received from the external output terminal 261) ( S3601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the power-on flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is on (S3621). If it is determined that the power-on flag is on (S3621: Yes), the process proceeds to S3605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-on flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S3621: No), then whether or not the state notification flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is on. Is discriminated (S3622).

  If it is determined in the process of S3622 that the state notification flag is not on (is off) (S3622: No), the external output signal received this time is output from the pachinko machine 10 based on the occurrence of power interruption. Since it is information indicating the state, the information in the information storage area at the time of power interruption is updated based on the received external output signal (S3623), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined by the processing of S3622 that the state notification flag is on (S3622: Yes), a signal indicating the gaming state output from the pachinko machine 10 upon detection of power-off is received, and information on power interruption This indicates that information indicating the gaming state has been stored in the storage area. Therefore, since it is considered that the external output signal received this time has been erroneously received due to the influence of noise or the like, the process of S3623 is skipped, and this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to suppress rewriting of information in the information storage area at the time of power interruption to incorrect information, and it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of abnormality or fraud in the pachinko machine 10 at the next power-on.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to be able to output a plurality of types of signals having different modes from the CN1 of the external output terminal board 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and when a power interruption is detected. doing.

  Specifically, a signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on, a signal for notifying the external device that the power-off has been detected, and a signal that is output when the gaming state is a big hit Can be output. These signals have different output periods (periods set to the H output state), and external devices such as the hall computer 262 determine the type of the signal output from the CN 1 based on the difference in the output periods. can do.

  Thus, by using CN1 as a shared channel capable of outputting a plurality of signals, the number of channels can be reduced as compared with the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the number of parts of the external output terminal board 261 and the number of harnesses connecting the pachinko machine 10 and the external device can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 and its peripheral devices (external devices) can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the output period of the signal for notifying the external device that the power is turned on (the period for setting the H output state) is 0.5 seconds, and the external device is notified that the power-off is detected. The signal output period (H output state period) is 0.3 seconds and the special game state signal output period (H output state period) is 0.1 seconds. The three types of signals can be arbitrarily determined within a range that can be identified by the external device. For example, the output period of a signal for notifying the external device that power-off has been detected may be shortened (for example, 0.05 seconds). In this way, by shortening the output period of the signal for notifying that power-off has been detected, the time until the end of outputting the information indicating the gaming state can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the power storage means for supplying power after the power interruption occurs. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by introducing power storage means with a small capacity. Further, the output period of the signal output when the power interruption is detected may be longer than that of other signals (for example, 0.7 seconds). Thereby, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can perform processing for detecting a signal output period at a relatively long interval. Therefore, the processing load on the external device can be reduced.

  Further, for example, the output period of a signal for notifying an external device that power is turned on may be shortened (for example, 0.1 second). Thus, by shortening the output period of the signal for notifying that the power is turned on, the time until the end of outputting the information indicating the gaming state can be shortened. Therefore, since the time required for the start-up process (see FIG. 73) can be shortened, the time from when the power is turned on until the game can be started can be further shortened. In addition, the output period of a signal output when power-on is detected may be longer than other signals (for example, 0.7 seconds). Thereby, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can perform processing for detecting a signal output period at a relatively long interval. Therefore, the processing load on the external device can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the CN1 is configured to output a signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on and a signal for notifying the external device that the power supply has been detected. It may be configured to output from the other channels. For example, it may be configured to output a signal to output to the external device that power is turned on from CN2, and to output a signal to notify the external device that power has been detected from CN3. Further, a signal for notifying the external device that the power has been turned on and a signal for notifying the external device that the power supply has been detected are output from channels other than the channel that outputs the signal indicating the gaming state. You may comprise. For example, a signal for notifying the external device that the power is turned on from the CN 8 and a signal for notifying the external device that the power interruption has been detected may be output. Alternatively, the CN 8 may be configured to output a signal notifying the external device that the power has been turned on, and outputting a signal notifying the external device that the power failure has been detected from the CN 9. Thereby, CN1 to CN7 need only output information indicating the gaming state, and there is no need to switch between the H output state and the L output state of the signal at short intervals. Therefore, switching errors between the H output state and the L output state of the signal can be suppressed, and information indicating the gaming state can be accurately output from each pin.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 100. In the first embodiment described above, the signal output from CN1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is changed in conjunction with the power supply state of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-on state, the CN1 is continuously set to the H output state. When the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the power is turned on next time. , CN1 continues to be set to the L output state. Based on the output state of CN1, an external device such as the hall computer 262 quickly determines whether there is an abnormality at the stage when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (that is, before the player starts the game). Was configured to be able to.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined signal is notified independently from each output channel of the external output terminal board 261, and a plurality of times A difference is that a period for outputting a predetermined signal by combining some of the output channels is set. The detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configurations of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 262 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85. In the electrical configuration in the third embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and the hard disk provided in the hall computer 262 273 has been partially changed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The RAM 203 according to the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment in that a variation type storage area 203s, a stop type storage area 203t, and a jackpot type storage area 203u are added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation type storage area 203s is a storage area in which the selected variation pattern is stored. Based on the variation pattern type stored in the variation type storage area 203s, the variation pattern type is output from the external output terminal version 261 to an external device such as the hall computer 262. The hall computer 262 stores a history of variation patterns based on the variation pattern type notified from the external output terminal board 261.

  The stop type storage area 203t is a storage area in which the selected stop type is stored. Based on the stop type stored in the change type storage area 203 s, the change pattern type is output from the external output terminal version 261 to an external device such as the hall computer 262. The hall computer 262 stores a history of the stop type based on the stop type notified from the external output terminal version 261.

  The jackpot type storage area 203u is a storage area for storing the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Based on the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area 203u, the jackpot type of this time is output from the external output terminal version 261 to an external device such as the hall computer 262. The hall computer 262 stores a jackpot type history based on the jackpot type notified from the external output terminal version 261.

  Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment, four types of jackpot types, jackpot A to jackpot D, are set, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each jackpot type. Has been.

  For the big hit A, in the first round of the big hit, the second specific prize opening (second big opening) 140a is opened during the period in which the flow path of the lottery device 700 is set as the front flow path (FIG. 16 ( a)), the number of rounds is a jackpot of two rounds (the root jackpot for the route before two rounds). The jackpot B is a round in which, in the first round of jackpot, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened during a period in which the flow path of the lottery device 700 is set as the front flow path. The number is a jackpot of four rounds (four rounds before the root jackpot), and the jackpot C is the second specific prize opening during the period in which the flow path of the lottery device 700 is set as the front flow path in the first round of the jackpot (Second large opening) 140a is opened, and the number of rounds is a jackpot of 8 rounds (8 rounds before the route jackpot).

  Also, in the big hit D, in the first round of the big hit, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened during the period in which the flow path of the lottery device 700 is set as the flow path on the back side (see FIG. 16 (b)), the number of rounds is a jackpot of 8 rounds (8 rounds back route jackpot). As described above, in the third embodiment, the number of jackpot types is set to be large and the game is diversified as compared to the first embodiment.

  In addition, as described above, when the game ball passes through the flow path on the back side of the lottery apparatus 700, it is more advantageous than the game ball passes through the flow path on the near side of the lottery apparatus 700. In the present embodiment, the back route jackpot that is advantageous to the player is only the jackpot of 8 rounds (bonanza D) having a relatively large number of rounds, so that the player has a greater joy of winning by winning the jackpot D Can be. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Note that the jackpot type is not limited to the four types of the present embodiment, and more jackpot types may be provided. By diversifying the jackpot type, when the jackpot is won, the player can be interested in which jackpot type, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Next, an external output signal output to the hall computer 262 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the third embodiment, after the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (after the power for operation is started to be supplied to the main controller 110), a signal indicating the switching to the multi-pin output mode (hereinafter referred to as the output mode). A period until the switching signal is output is set as a single-pin output mode period (see FIG. 84). This single pin output mode period is a period in which each output channel (output terminal) of the external output terminal plate 261 is configured and output as a single signal.

  When the output mode switching signal is output during the single pin output mode, the multiple pin output mode is set. The period in which the multi-pin output mode is set is a period from when the output mode switching signal is output until the start-up process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 ends.

  During the period in which the multi-pin output mode is set, a plurality of output channels of the external output terminal board 261 are combined to form one signal and output it to the hall computer 262.

  In the third embodiment, the single pin mode is set when the start-up process (see FIG. 42) ends and the normal process (the period during which the main process (see FIG. 47) can be executed) is entered. In the normal single pin mode, the big hit game is started, and the multi-pin output mode is set by outputting the big hit state signal (CN12 (see FIG. 80)) for 0.5 seconds. In the set multi-pin output mode period, the CN 12 of the external output terminal board 261 is output for 0.1 second at the end of the jackpot, thereby switching to the single-pin output mode.

  As described above, the start and end times of the multi-pin output mode can be discriminated by varying the signal output period of CN12 (normally a big hit state signal) of the external output terminal plate 261.

  In this embodiment, the pin mode is switched by outputting an output mode switching signal at the time of start-up. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after a power-on signal (CN1) is output, a certain period of time is output. It may be configured such that the single pin output mode is set for (for example, 2 seconds), and thereafter, a certain period (for example, for 2 seconds or until the start-up process is completed) is set to the multiple pin output mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to perform a control process for outputting a switching signal, and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is started, a signal with a large amount of information can be output by setting a multi-pin output mode, but a period other than during the jackpot game is set as a multi-pin output period. You may comprise as follows. Further, the plural pin output period and the single pin output period are alternately set to output a larger amount of information to the hall computer 262 while suppressing an increase in the number of terminals of the external output terminal plate 261. You may comprise so that it can do.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a list of external output signals in the normal single-pin output mode. This single pin mode output mode is different from the normal external output signal (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment in that the big hit middle signal (CN12) is changed to the big hit state signal (CN12). . The jackpot state signal (CN12) is a signal that is set to the H output state for 0.5 seconds at the timing when the jackpot game is started. By outputting the jackpot state signal, it is possible to notify an external device such as the hall computer 262 that the pachinko machine 10 has won the jackpot. In addition, it is possible to notify an external device that the period has shifted to the multi-pin output period. The hall computer 262 adds 1 to the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10 based on receiving this jackpot status signal. In addition, the multi-pin output mode signal is set to be receivable. Since the configuration other than the CN 12 is the same as that of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the external output signal in the multi-pin output mode at the normal time will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a list of external output signals in the normal multiple pin output mode. When the multi-pin output mode is set, a 2-bit hit type signal is output by combining CN6 and CN12. When the hit type signal is a big hit A, a 2-bit signal of “00 (LL)” is output (CN6 and CN12 are both set to the L output state).

  On the other hand, in the case of jackpot B, a 2-bit signal of “01 (LH)” is output (CN6 is set to H output state and CN12 is set to L output state), and in the case of jackpot C, A 2-bit signal of “10 (HL)” is output (CN6 is set to the L output state and CN12 is set to the H output state). Further, when the jackpot is D, a 2-bit signal of “11 (HH)” is output (CN6 and CN12 are both set to the H output state). Further, the H output signals output from CN6 and CN12 are each output for 0.2 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80, in the single-pin output mode, the output periods of CN6 and CN12 are 1 second and 0.5 seconds, respectively, and the signal output period is different in the single-pin output mode and the multi-pin output mode. It is configured differently. In this way, by changing the signal output period between the single pin output mode and the multiple pin output mode, even if the hall computer 262 cannot receive the jackpot state signal (CN12), the current mode can be determined. It is configured.

  Also, in the multi-pin output mode, CN6 and CN12 are selected as channels for outputting a 2-bit signal for notifying the jackpot type when the signals output from CN6 and CN12 are being jackpoted. This is because the signal type has no possibility of being output. That is, the signal output from the CN 6 is a signal indicating that the symbol variation has stopped, and the symbol stop signal is not output during the big hit when the special symbol variation itself is not performed, and the symbol stop signal is output. There is no opportunity to do. Further, the signal output from the CN 12 is a signal indicating the start of the jackpot, and there is no opportunity to output it after the jackpot is started. Therefore, by configuring a multi-pin output mode signal (hit type signal) using an output channel that is not used during jackpot, a signal with a large amount of information can be transferred to an external device without increasing the number of channels. Can be output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the types of signals output from the external output terminal plate 261 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is started up and when a power failure is detected will be described. . In the present embodiment, the single-pin output mode and the multiple-pin output mode are set even when starting up and when the power is turned off.

  First, FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the contents of signals output from each channel of the external output terminal board 261 in the single-pin output mode set after the power is turned on and after the power-off is detected. The state of the single pin output mode shifts when power is turned on and when power is cut off.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the single-pin output mode in the third embodiment, signals other than those output from CN8 are output at the time of startup from the external output terminal version 261 in the first embodiment and at the detection of power-off. The same signal as that is output. The CN8 of the external output terminal plate 261 in the third embodiment is configured to be able to output an output mode switching signal at the time of start-up, detection of power-off, and single-pin output mode. This output mode switching signal is a signal for notifying an external device such as the hall computer 262 that the output mode of the signal is switched. In other words, when the output of the single pin output mode is completed at the time of start-up or when power-off is detected, an output mode switching signal is output (CN8 is set to the H output state for 0.1 second), thereby outputting a plurality of pins Notify external device of switching to mode. By this output mode switching signal, the external device can easily determine the output mode of the next signal to be received, and can appropriately receive the signal corresponding to the output mode.

  Next, referring to FIG. 83, the contents of signals output from the respective channels of the external output terminal board 261 in the multi-pin output mode set at the time of start-up upon power-on and after detection of power-off are shown. It is a figure. The multi-pin output mode is entered after the output mode switching signal is output from the CN 8 in the single-pin output mode.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the multi-pin output mode set at the time of start-up upon power-on and after detection of power-off, the power is turned on from CN1 in the same manner as in other states (see FIGS. 80 to 83) A signal is output. In the multi-pin output mode, a 6-bit status notification signal is output by combining the outputs of CN2 to CN7. This status notification signal is used to notify the number of times of normal symbols and the jackpot type.

  Specifically, when the power is turned on or when the power-off is detected when the normal symbol is short (that is, when a short-time signal is output in the single pin output mode), CN2 to CN7 6 Using the signal (6-bit signal) output from the channel, the number of time reductions from 0 to 50 times is notified. For example, when the remaining number of time reductions is 30, the output of each channel of CN2 to CN7 is set to “011110 (LHHHHHL)”. This is a value representing the number of time reductions “30 times” in binary, and is “30” in decimal conversion. Thereby, an external device such as a hall computer can easily recognize the remaining number of times. And when the number of time reductions notified by the multi-pin output mode is different between the previous power-off and the current power-on, some abnormality or fraudulent action has been performed on the pachinko machine 10 Since it is possible to determine that there is a possibility of being abnormal, it is possible to suppress abnormality and fraud by notifying the abnormality.

  The signal output period for notifying the number of time reductions is set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the output period is set to be different from the output period (see FIGS. 80 to 82) of signals output from each channel in other states. As a result, even if the hall computer 262 cannot normally receive the output mode switching signal output from the CN 8 in the single pin output mode, the received signal is in the multi-pin output mode depending on the output period. It can be determined that it is a signal.

  On the other hand, when the power-on or power-off detection is in a big hit state (that is, when a special gaming state signal is output in the single pin output mode), among the 6 bits of CN2 to CN7, The jackpot type is notified using the lower 2 bits (CN2 and CN3).

  Specifically, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a 2-bit signal of “00 (LL)” is output (CN2 and CN3 are both set to the L output state), and jackpot B is set In this case, a 2-bit signal of “01 (LH)” is output (CN2 is set to an H output state and CN3 is set to an H output state), and when the jackpot C is “10 (HL)” A 2-bit signal is output (CN2 is set to the L output state and CN3 is set to the H output state). When the jackpot is D, a 2-bit signal of “11 (HH)” is output ( CN6 and CN3 are both set to the H output state). While these signals are being output, all of CN4 to CN7 are set to the L output state.

  The output period of the signal for notifying the jackpot type is set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the output period is set to be different from the output period (see FIGS. 80 to 82) of signals output from each channel in other states. As a result, even if the hall computer 262 cannot normally receive the output mode switching signal output from the CN 8 in the single pin output mode, the received signal is in the multi-pin output mode depending on the output period. It can be determined that it is a signal.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 83, in the multiple pin output mode, CN8 becomes an unused channel (no signal is output). This is because the output mode switching signal is output from the CN 8 in the single pin output mode. In other words, if it is configured to be able to output a signal from CN8 in the multi-pin output mode, the external device that received the signal output from CN8 will mistakenly recognize it as an output mode switching signal, and accurately receive the signal in the multi-pin output mode. There is a possibility that it cannot be done. Therefore, in the multi-pin output mode, it is configured not to output a signal from the CN 8, and it is possible to prevent an external device such as the hall computer 262 from misidentifying the signal output mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 83, in the multiple pin output mode, a 5-bit variation type notification signal is output by combining the outputs of CN9 to CN13. This variation type notification signal is used to notify the variation pattern type and the stop type.

  Specifically, when the special symbol is changing when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off, the change type is indicated by a signal (3-bit signal) output from the three channels CN9 to CN11. Notification is made to an external device such as the hall computer 262. Further, the stop type is notified to an external device such as the hall computer 262 by a signal (2-bit signal) output from the two channels CN12 and CN13.

  In the case of notifying the fluctuation type, for example, when the fluctuation type is “normally out”, the output of each channel of CN9 to CN11 is set to “001 (LLH)”, and the fluctuation type is “out of short”. In the case of “reach”, it is set to be “010 (LHL)”, and in the case where the fluctuation type is “outside long reach”, it is set to be “011 (LHH)”, and “outside super reach” is set. In this case, it may be set to be “100 (HLL)”.

  Also, for example, when the variation type is “win short reach”, the output of each channel of CN 9 to CN 11 is set to “101 (HLH)”, and when “win long reach”, “110 (HHL) ”, and in the case of“ hit super reach ”, it may be set to“ 111 (HHH) ”. Further, when the power is turned on or when the state when the power interruption is detected is not changing, the output of each channel of CN9 to CN11 may be set to “000 (LLL)”. By providing a dedicated output state when not changing, even if the symbol fluctuation signal cannot be normally received in the single pin output mode, after switching to the multiple pin output mode, CN9 to CN11 Based on the mode of the signal output from each channel, it can be determined whether or not it is changing.

  Further, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is notified, for example, when the stop type is “completely out”, the output of each channel of CN12 and CN13 is set to “01 (LH)”. Is set to be “10 (HL)” when “reach other than front / rear out” is set, and “11 (HH)” is set when the stop type is “rear out of front / rear”. . When the state when the power is turned on or when the power interruption is detected is not changing, or when the state is being changed, the output of each channel of CN12 and CN13 is set to “00 (LL)”. Should be set.

  It should be noted that the output period of a signal for notifying these variation types and stop types to an external device (such as the hall computer 262) is set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the output period is set to be different from the output period (see FIGS. 80 to 82) of signals output from each channel in other states. As a result, even if the hall computer 262 cannot normally receive the output mode switching signal output from the CN 8 in the single pin output mode, the received signal is in the multi-pin output mode depending on the output period. It can be determined that it is a signal.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 83, in the multiple pin output mode, the CN 14 outputs a signal (notification end signal) indicating that the output of the information indicating the gaming state in the multiple pin output mode has been completed. This notification end signal is a signal that is set to the H output state for 0.3 seconds after the output of the state notification signal and the variation type notification signal is completed. Based on this notification end signal, the hall computer 262 can determine that the output of the information indicating the gaming state output from the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. Therefore, at the time of start-up based on power-on, based on the notification end signal being output, the information stored in the power-off information storage area based on the previous power-off and the gaming state notified this time Can be compared with the information indicating. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 detects the power interruption, the information stored in the information storage area at the time of power interruption is prohibited from being updated based on the output of the notification end signal. As a result of other signals (for example, signals output from the external output terminal board 261 of other pachinko machines 10) being altered and output to the hall computer 262 due to the influence of noise or the like after the power supply is cut off, It is possible to prevent the information in the information storage area from being rewritten with inappropriate information.

  Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 84, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a signal output mode is taken as an example of notifying that the short state of the normal symbol remains 30 times. How to switch will be described.

  When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, CN1 rises to the H output state as in the first embodiment. By detecting the H output signal from CN1, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on, so that it can accept a single pin output mode signal. To do. After that, when the MPU 201 can access the RAM 203 and reads that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 30, first, a time reduction signal is output as a single-pin output mode signal (CN4 is set to 0.1 second). Set to H output state). Based on this time reduction signal, the hall computer 262 indicates that the normal symbol is in a time reduction state for the power recovery information storage area of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the time reduction signal. Remember.

  When the output of the time reduction signal is completed (that is, when 0.1 second has elapsed since CN4 was set to the H output state), then an output mode switching signal is output (that is, CN8 is output for 0.1 second). Set to H output state). As described above, with this output mode switching signal, signal output in the single pin output mode is completed, and it is possible to notify an external device such as the hall computer 262 that switching to the multiple pin output mode is performed. The hall computer 262 can set the multi-pin output mode signal to be receivable based on the output mode switching signal.

  When the output of the output mode switching signal is completed, a signal of the multi-pin output mode is then output. In this multi-pin output mode, in order to notify that the remaining number of times of normal symbols is 30, the output of each channel is “011110 (LHHHHHL)” for 0.3 seconds by combining the outputs of CN2 to CN7. (That is, an output corresponding to a value obtained by converting the decimal value “30” into a binary number). The hall computer 262 stores information indicating that the number of times of normal symbols is 30 in the power recovery information storage area based on the signals output from the channels CN2 to CN7.

  When the output of each channel of CN2 to CN7 is completed, a notification end signal is then output (that is, CN14 is set to the H output state for 0.3 seconds). Upon receiving this notification end signal, the hall computer 262 can determine that the output of the information indicating the gaming state from the pachinko machine 10 has ended. Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the information stored in the power recovery information storage area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the information stored in the power interruption information storage area at the time of the previous power failure detection. It can be confirmed whether the pachinko machine 10 has a possibility of abnormality or fraud. Further, after the notification end signal is output, the single-pin output mode is set, and an external output signal for normal use (see FIG. 80) is set to be outputable. This single pin output mode continues until a big win is won or a power loss is detected.

  In this way, by switching between the single pin output mode and the multiple pin output mode according to the state, information having a larger amount of data than the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment is transferred to the hall computer 262 or the like. Can be output to an external device. Therefore, it is possible to cause the external device such as the hall computer 262 to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming situation in more detail. Thereby, the abnormality which generate | occur | produced in the pachinko machine 10, an unauthorized act, etc. can be identified more reliably.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the electrical configuration of the hall computer 262 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the data storage area corresponding to each pachinko machine 10 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first data storage area 273a of the hall computer 262 in the third embodiment. In the first data storage area 273a in the third embodiment, a multi-pin reception flag 273a16 is added to the configuration of the first data storage area 273a (FIG. 29B) in the first embodiment.

  The multiple pin reception flag 273a16 is a flag indicating whether the multiple pin output mode is set. If this multi-pin reception flag 273a16 is ON, it indicates that the multi-pin output mode signal (see FIGS. 81 and 83) can be received from the first pachinko machine 10, and the multi-pin reception flag 273a16 is set. If it is off, it indicates that a single pin output mode signal (see FIGS. 80 and 82) can be received from the first pachinko machine 10. This multi-pin reception flag is set to ON when receiving an output mode switching signal output from the pachinko machine 10 at the time of start-up or when power-off is detected (see S4306 in FIG. 98 and S4406 in FIG. 99). . In addition, in a normal state, when a jackpot state signal is received from the pachinko machine 10, it is set to ON (see S4506 in FIG. 100). A flag corresponding to the multi-pin reception flag 273a16 of the first data storage area 273a is also added to the data storage area other than the first data storage area 273a.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 95. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the contents of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30), the start-up process (see FIG. 42), and the main process (see FIG. 47) are changed from the first embodiment. Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process. In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 31) is different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. It is different in that it is changed to (see FIG. 87). Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). Among the special symbol variation process 2, the processes of S201 to S207 and S209 to S217 are respectively the processes of S201 to S207 and S209 to S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processing is executed. In the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) in the third embodiment, the special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 31) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. Instead, control is performed to execute special symbol variation start processing 2 (S221).

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S213 that the current lottery result is a big hit (S213: Yes), information corresponding to the current big hit type is stored in the big hit type storage area. Control is made to store the data in 203u (S221), and the process proceeds to S214. Based on the jackpot type stored by the processing of S221, the output of the hit type signal is set during the jackpot. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S221) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S221).

  Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S221), the same processes as S301 to S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed in each process of S301 to S312. Is done. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (S221) of the present embodiment, after the variation pattern command is set in the process of S310, the process of S321 is executed. In the process of S321, information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set in the process of S310 is stored in the fluctuation type storage area 203s (S321). The variation type stored here is notified from the external output terminal board 261 to an external device (such as the hall computer 262) when a power interruption occurs during the variation and when the power is turned on next time. Based on the information notified from the pachinko machine 10, the hall computer 262 determines whether or not the variation type has changed at the time of power-off and the next power-on, and the variation type has changed. In such a case, it can be notified that there is a possibility of some abnormality or fraud.

  In the special symbol variation start process 2 of the present embodiment, after the stop type command is set in the process of S311, information according to the current stop type is stored in the stop type storage area 203t (S322). The variation type stored here indicates the variation type from the external output terminal board 261 to an external device (such as the hall computer 262) when a power interruption occurs during the variation and when the power is turned on next time. It is notified with information. Based on the information notified from the pachinko machine 10, the hall computer 262 determines whether or not the stop type is changed when the power is cut off and at the next power-on, and the stop type is changed. In such a case, it can be notified that there is a possibility of some abnormality or fraud.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the information indicating the variation type and the stop type is configured to be output only when the power-off is detected and when the power is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the information indicating the variation type and the information indicating the stop type may be output from the external output terminal board 261 to an external device such as the hall computer 262 every time the variation is started. Thereby, since the hall computer 262 can grasp the variation type and the stop type for each variation, more detailed information can be stored as the game history of each pachinko machine 10. In addition, the variable type storage area 203s and the stop type storage area 203t are configured so that information for a plurality of times can be stored, and a game history is created by the pachinko machine 10, and then the hall computer 262 is stored. You may comprise so that it may output. In addition, a liquid crystal display device or the like is installed on the hall side for each pachinko machine 10 so as to display statistical data of the pachinko machine 10 (the ratio that has been won in each variation pattern). Also good. Thereby, much information regarding the pachinko machine 10 can be given to the player.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of this startup process.

  Among the start-up processes (see FIG. 89) in the third embodiment, in the processes of S1301 to S1310 and S1312-1319, S1301 to S1310 of the start-up process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, and The same processes as those in S1312 to 1319 are executed. In the startup process in the third embodiment, the startup signal output process 2 is executed instead of the startup signal output process (see S1311 in FIG. 45) executed in the startup process of the first embodiment. (S1331). In the start-up signal output process, a signal to be output from the external output terminal board 261 to an external device such as a hall computer is set in the same manner as the start-up signal output process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 45). It is processing. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the startup signal output processing 2 (S1331) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the startup signal output process 2 (S1331). In the startup signal output process 2 (S1331) in the third embodiment, in the processes of S1601 to S1613, the processes of S1601 to S1613 of the startup signal output process (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing is executed. In the startup signal output process 2 in the present embodiment, the processes in S1615 to S1616 of the startup signal output process in the first embodiment are deleted, and the processes in S1621 to S1623 are added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the process of S1613 is executed, in the process of S1621, the output mode switching signal (CN8) starts to be output (set to the H output state) (S1621). Thereafter, it is determined whether 0.1 second has elapsed (S1622), and when it is determined that 0.1 second has not elapsed (S1622: No), the processing of S1622 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that 0.1 second has elapsed (S1622: Yes), a multi-pin output process for setting a multi-pin output mode signal is executed (S1623), and this process ends. The details of the multiple pin output process (S1623) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the multi-pin output process (S1623). In the multi-pin output process (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203g is on (S4101). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203g is on (S4101: Yes), the jackpot type is specified based on the information of the jackpot type storage area (S4102). Based on the jackpot type, the output of status notification signals (CN2 to CN7) is set (S4103). For example, if the current jackpot type is jackpot C, CN3 is set to the H output state, and CN2 and CN4 to CN7 are set to the L output state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4104. On the other hand, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203g is off (S4101: No), the processes of S4102 and S4103 are skipped, and the process of S4104 is executed.

  In the processing of S4104, it is determined whether or not the hour / minute counter 203f has a value of 1 or more (S4104). If it is determined that the hour / short counter 203f has a value of 1 or more (S4104: Yes), the output of the state notification signals (CN2 to CN7) is set based on the value of the hour / short counter 203f (S4105). ). For example, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is “30”, CN3 to CN6 are set to the H output state, and CN1 and CN7 are set to the L output state. Then, when the process of S4105 ends, the process proceeds to S4106. On the other hand, in the process of S4104, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S4105: No), the process of S4105 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4106.

  In the process of S4106, it is determined whether the changing flag 203h is on (S4106). If it is determined that the changing flag 203h is on (S4106: Yes), the changing type storage area 203s, the stop type storage area Based on the information of 203t, the change type and the stop type are respectively specified (S4107), and the output of the change type notification signals (CN9 to 13) is set based on the specified contents (S4108). Thereafter, the process of S4109 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4106, when it is determined that the changing flag 203h is OFF (S4106: No), the processes of S4107 and S4108 are skipped, and the process of S4109 is executed.

  In the subsequent process of S4109, it is determined whether there is an output other than CN1 (whether there is a channel in the H output state) (S4109). If it is determined that there is an output other than CN1 (S4109: Yes), a process of waiting for 0.1 second is executed (S4110). If it is determined that 0.1 second has elapsed (S4110: Yes), outputs other than CN1 are stopped (set to the L output state), and the process proceeds to S4112. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no output other than CN1 in the process of S4109 (S4109: No), the processes of S4110 and S4111 are skipped, and the process of S4112 is performed. Run.

  In the process of S4112 executed after the process of S4109 or S4111, output of the notification end signal (CN14) is started (S4112). Thereafter, a process of waiting for 0.1 second (S4113) is executed. If it is determined that 0.1 second has elapsed (S4113: Yes), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process. In the main processing (see FIG. 92) in the third embodiment, in steps S1801 to S1803 and S1805 to S1819, S1801 to S1803 and S1805 of the main processing (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as that of S1819 is executed. In the power interruption signal output process in the main process of the present embodiment (S1817), a signal in the single pin output mode is output by the same process as the startup signal output process 2 (see FIG. 90) described above. Then, switching to the multi-pin output mode is executed. After switching to the multi-pin output mode, a signal in the multi-pin output mode is output by the same process as the above-described multi-pin output process (see FIG. 91). Further, in the main process in the present embodiment, a jackpot control process 2 (S1821) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (S1804) executed in the first embodiment main process (see FIG. 47). Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the aforementioned jackpot control process 2 (S1821) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1821). In the jackpot control process 2 in the third embodiment, in the processes of S1901 to S1904, S1906 to S1913, S1915, and S1916, the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 48), S1901 to S1904, S1906 to S1906, respectively. The same processes as those of S1913, S1915, and S1916 are executed. In the jackpot control process 2 (S1831) of the third embodiment, when the process of S1904 ends, the jackpot status signal (CN12) is replaced with the process of S1905 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment. ) Is set to be in the H output state for 0.5 seconds (S1921), and this process is terminated. The jackpot status signal (CN12) set here notifies the start of the jackpot to an external device such as a hall computer and also notifies the switching to the multi-pin output mode.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is being hit in the process of S1906 (S1906: Yes), a hit for notifying the external device such as the hall computer 262 of the current jackpot type A hit notification process for setting a type signal is executed (S1922), and the process proceeds to S1907. This winning type notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, instead of the jackpot end process (see S1914 in FIG. 48) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment, the jackpot end process 2 is performed. It is executed (S1923). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot end process 2 is a process for setting the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment.

  Next, the hit type notification process (S1922) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit type notification process (S1922).

  In the winning type notification process (S1922), it is first determined whether it is the output timing of the winning type signal (CN6, CN12) (S4201). Specifically, when 0.5 seconds or more have elapsed since the H output of the jackpot state signal (CN12) output at the start of the jackpot is stopped, it is determined that it is the output timing of the hit type signal. Since the big hit status signal and the hit type signal are both signals output using the CN 12, by starting the output of the hit type signal with an interval of 0.5 seconds or more from the output stop of the big hit status signal. An external device such as the hall computer 262 can easily distinguish the big hit status signal from the hit type signal. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the hall computer 262 erroneously recognizes the big hit state signal and the hit type signal and stores the incorrect hit type as the history of the pachinko machine 10.

  If it is determined in the process of S4201 that it is the output timing of the hit type signal (S4201: Yes), the current big hit type is read from the big hit type storage area 203u (S4202). Then, based on the jackpot type read out in the process of S4202, the output of the hit type signal (CN6, 12) is set (S4203), and this process ends. Specifically, when the big hit is a big hit A, a 2-bit signal of “00 (LL)” is output (both CN6 and CN12 are set to the L output state), and the big hit B is In this case, a 2-bit signal of “01 (LH)” is output (CN6 is set to an H output state and CN12 is set to an L output state), and when the jackpot C is “10 (HL)” When a 2-bit signal is output (CN6 is set to an L output state and CN12 is set to an H output state) and the jackpot is D, a 2-bit signal of “11 (HH)” is output (CN6, And CN12 are both set to the H output state).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that it is not the output timing of the hit type signal (CN6, CN12) (S4201: No), this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot end process 2 (S1923) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 95 is a process executed in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 93) in the third embodiment as described above, and is a process for setting the end of the jackpot.

  In each process of S2101 to S2105 in the jackpot end process 2 (S1923) in the third embodiment, the same processes as the processes in S2101 to S2105 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment are executed. Is done. In the jackpot end process 2 (S1923) in the third embodiment, the process of S2111 is executed instead of the process of S2106 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment. Yes.

  Specifically, in the jackpot end process 2 (S1923), when the process of S2105 ends, a signal (CN12) indicating the cancellation of the multi-pin output mode is then output (CN12 is in the H output state for 0.1 second) (Set) processing is executed (S2111), and this processing is terminated. The hall computer 262 discriminates the single pin output mode and the multiple pin output mode, discriminates the signals output from the external output terminal board 261, and executes necessary processing.

<Regarding Control Processing of Hall Computer in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 100.

  First, with reference to FIG. 96, the main process executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  In the main process of the control device 272 in the third embodiment, the same processes as S3501 and S3503 to S3508 of the main process in the first embodiment are executed in S3501 and S3503 to S3508, respectively. The In the main process in the present embodiment, when the initial setting process is completed (S3501), the signal reception process is performed instead of the signal reception process (see S3502 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process in the first embodiment. Process 3 is executed (S3521), and the process proceeds to S3503. This signal reception process 3 (S3521) is a process for executing a process according to the signal received from the pachinko machine 10, as in the signal reception process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Details of the signal reception process 3 (S3521) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating the above-described signal reception process 3 (S3521). Among these signal reception processes 3 (S3521), in each process of S3601, S3602, S3605, and S3609 to S3613, S3601, S3602, S3605, and S3609 to The same processes as those in S3613 are executed.

  In the signal reception process 3 (S3521) in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S3602 that the power-on signal (CN1) is not in the H output state (that is, in the L output state) (S3602: No) Next, the reception process at the time of power interruption is executed (S3631), and this process is terminated. This power interruption reception process receives signals of each output mode (single pin output mode and multiple pin output mode) output from the pachinko machine 10 when a power interruption is detected in the pachinko machine 10. Is a process for performing control according to the above. The power interruption reception process (S3631) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the power interruption reception process (S3631). In the power interruption reception process (S3631), first, it is determined whether or not the multi-pin reception flag of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has received the external output signal is on (S4301), and is on. Is determined (S4301: Yes), it is then determined whether a notification end signal is received from the pachinko machine 10 (that is, whether the CN 14 is detected to be H output for 0.3 seconds) (S4302).

  If it is determined in step S4302 that the notification end signal has not been received (S4302: No), the external output signal received this time is the status notification signal (CN2 to CN7) and the variation type notification signal (CN9 to CN13). ) Or both. Therefore, based on the information notified by these signals, the contents of the information storage area at the time of power interruption of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the information are updated (S4303), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the notification end signal has been received, the multi-pin reception flag is set to OFF and power is interrupted until the next power-on (that is, until CN1 is in the H output state). Updating of the time information storage area is prohibited (S4304), and this process ends. Thereby, after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, other signals (for example, signals output from the external output terminal board 261 of the other pachinko machine 10) are altered and output to the hall computer 262 due to the influence of noise or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information in the power interruption information storage area from being rewritten with inappropriate information.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the multi-pin reception flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S4301: No), then whether or not an output mode switching signal has been received (that is, CN8 is 0.1). (S4305), and if it is determined that the output mode switching signal has been received (S4305: Yes), the pachinko machine that has output the output mode switching signal The multi-pin reception flag of the data storage area corresponding to 10 is set to ON, and then the multi-pin output mode signal output from the pachinko machine 10 is set to be receivable (S4306). For example, when an output mode switching signal is output from the first pachinko machine 10, the multi-pin reception flag 273a16 of the first data storage area 273a in the hard disk 273 is set to ON. In addition, when the process of S4306 ends, this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4305 that an output mode switching signal has not been received (S4305), the external output signal received this time is a signal output from CN2 to CN7 in the single pin output mode (see FIG. 82). Since it shows that there is, the content of the information storage area at the time of power interruption of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the signal is updated based on the received signal (S4307). For example, when an external output signal is output from the first pachinko machine 10, the power interruption information storage area 273a11 of the first data storage area 273a in the hard disk 273 is updated. Further, when the process of S4307 ends, this process ends.

  As described above, the hall computer 262 determines the gaming state notified from the pachinko machine 10 when the power interruption occurs according to the output state of the power-on signal (CN1) and the state of the multi-pin reception flag. The contents of the disconnection information storage area can be appropriately updated.

  Returning to FIG. 97, the description will be continued. In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the start flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is OFF (S3605: No), S3607 of the signal reception process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. , S3608 is replaced with a startup reception process (S3632), and this process is terminated. The start-up reception process is to update the contents of the power recovery information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 based on the external output signal output from the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is processing of. Details of the startup reception process (S3632) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the startup reception process (S3632). In this start-up reception process (S3632), first, it is determined whether or not the multi-pin reception flag in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has received the external output signal is on (S4401), and is on. If it is determined (S4401: Yes), it is then determined whether a notification end signal is received from the pachinko machine 10 (ie, whether it is detected that the CN 14 is at H output for 0.3 seconds) (S4402).

  If it is determined in step S4402 that the notification end signal has not been received (S4402: No), the external output signal received this time is the status notification signal (CN2 to CN7) and the variation type notification signal (CN9 to CN13). ) Or both. Therefore, based on the information notified by these signals, the contents of the power recovery time information storage area of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the information are updated (S4403), and this process ends. For example, when it is determined that information is output from the first pachinko machine 10, the contents of the power recovery information storage area 273a12 of the first data storage area 273a are updated based on the received signal.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4402 that the notification end signal has been received, the multi-pin reception flag is set to OFF and the single-pin output mode signal is set to be acceptable (S4404). finish. Thereby, the information according to the situation of the game output from the pachinko machine 10 at the normal time after the start-up of the pachinko machine 10 is completed can be appropriately received.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4401 that the multi-pin reception flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S4401: No), then whether or not an output mode switching signal is received (that is, CN8 is 0.1). (S4405), and if it is determined that the output mode switching signal has been received (S4405: Yes), the pachinko machine that has output the output mode switching signal The multi-pin reception flag in the data storage area corresponding to 10 is set to ON, and then the multi-pin output mode signal output from the pachinko machine 10 is set to be receivable (S4406). For example, when an output mode switching signal is output from the first pachinko machine 10, the multi-pin reception flag 273a16 of the first data storage area 273a in the hard disk 273 is set to ON. In addition, when the process of S4406 ends, this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4405 that an output mode switching signal has not been received (S4405), the external output signal received this time is a signal (see FIG. 82) output from CN2 to CN7 in the single-pin output mode. Since it shows that there is, the content of the information storage area at the time of power interruption of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that output the signal is updated based on the received signal (S4407). For example, when an external output signal is output from the first pachinko machine 10, the power recovery information storage area 273a11 of the first data storage area 273a in the hard disk 273 is updated. Further, when the process of S4307 ends, this process ends.

  In this way, the hall computer 262 determines the gaming state notified from the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on according to the output state of the power-on signal (CN1) and the state of the multi-pin reception flag, The contents of the time information storage area can be updated appropriately.

  Returning to FIG. 97, the description will be continued. In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the start flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is ON (S3605: Yes), S3606 of the signal reception process (see FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. Instead of the above process, a normal reception process is executed (S3633), and this process is terminated. The normal reception process is performed based on the external output signal received from the pachinko machine 10 in the normal time (that is, after the start-up based on power-on is completed until the next power-off occurs). This is a process for updating 10 game histories. Details of the normal reception process (S3633) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the normal reception process (S3633). In this normal reception process (S3633), first, it is determined whether or not the multi-pin reception flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is on (S4501), and the multi-pin reception flag is on. (S4501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not an H output signal for 0.1 seconds has been received from the CN 12 as a signal indicating the end of the jackpot (a signal indicating the end of the multi-pin output mode) (S4502). ).

  In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the signal indicating the end of the jackpot (the signal indicating the end of the multi-pin output mode) is not received (S4502: No), the external output signal received this time is the multi-pin output mode. Since this is a signal for notifying information according to the game situation (see FIG. 81), the information in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is updated (S4503). Exit. For example, when a 2-bit signal indicating that the current jackpot type is jackpot C is output from the first pachinko machine 10 (when CN6 is at L output and CN12 is at H output) ) Is controlled to store a jackpot type in association with the number of jackpots in a storage area (not shown) for storing a game history in the first data storage area 273a. For example, if the current jackpot is the fifth jackpot won that day, information indicating that the fifth jackpot is a jackpot C is stored. Thereby, since a detailed game history can be displayed on the display device 274, the hall clerk grasps the tendency of each pachinko machine 10 and uses it as a reference for increasing or decreasing the number of pachinko machines 10. Can do.

  In the process of S4502, when it is determined that a signal indicating the end of jackpot (a signal indicating the end of the multi-pin output mode) is received (S4502: Yes), the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the signal is stored. The multi-pin reception flag is set to OFF, and the single-pin output mode signal is set to be receivable (S4504). Thereby, an appropriate process can be performed according to the signal of the single pin output mode output from the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the jackpot.

  In the process of S4501, when it is determined that the multi-pin reception flag is not on (that is, is off) in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal (S4501: No), then the jackpot It is determined whether or not a jackpot status signal indicating the start of the event has been received (whether the H output from CN 12 has been detected for 0.5 seconds) (S4505). If it is determined that a jackpot status signal has been received (S4505: Yes) ) In the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the jackpot state signal, the multi-pin reception flag is set to ON, and the multi-pin output mode signal is set to be accepted (S4506). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately receive a 2-bit signal output by combining CN6 and CN12 and determine the type of jackpot of this time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4505 that the jackpot state signal has not been received (S4505: No), the information on the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal is used as the received external output signal. (S4507), and the process ends.

  As described above, the hall computer 262 can accumulate the game status notified from the pachinko machine 10 as a game history in the data storage area and display the game history on the display device 274. As a result, the hall clerk can grasp the characteristics of each pachinko machine 10, and based on the grasped characteristics, for example, the number of models having a high operation rate and profit rate can be increased, or the operation rate and profit rate can be increased. It is possible to reduce the number of models with low.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the single-pin output mode and the multiple-pin output mode are set, and different information can be output in each output mode. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the type of information and the amount of information (data amount) that can be output while suppressing an increase in the number of output channels of the external output terminal board 261. Therefore, since it can suppress that the number of parts of the external terminal board 261 and the number of parts of an external apparatus increase, it can suppress that the peripheral equipment of the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 enlarges.

  In the present embodiment, the switching from the single-pin output mode to the multiple-pin output mode is notified by the output mode switching signal (CN8). Accordingly, the hall computer 262 can easily determine the output mode of the signal output from the pachinko machine 10, and can perform processing appropriately according to the output mode.

  In the present embodiment, the output period of the signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 is varied depending on the output mode. Therefore, even if the output mode switching signal (CN8) cannot be normally received, the signal received from the pachinko machine 10 is simply determined by determining the output period of the signal output from the external output terminal plate 261. It is possible to determine whether the signal is a pin output mode signal or a multiple pin output mode signal. Therefore, the hall computer 262 can suitably perform processing according to the signal output from the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, when the output mode is switched, the output mode switching signal (CN8) is output (that is, CN8 is set to the H output state for 0.1 second). It is not limited to. For example, the mode may be switched based on the time since the power is turned on (the elapsed time since the output of the power-on signal is started). The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to measure the elapsed time when the power-on signal (CN1) is received from the pachinko machine 10, and determines the output mode of the signal received from the pachinko machine 10 according to the elapsed time. You may comprise as follows. With this configuration, the control process for outputting the output mode switching signal can be omitted, so that the processing load when the pachinko machine 10 is started up and when the power-off is detected can be reduced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it has comprised so that it may transfer to multiple pin output mode during jackpot game, it is not restricted to this. For example, it is configured to shift to a multi-pin output mode at the start of fluctuation, and information with a large amount of data related to the started symbol fluctuation (for example, fluctuation type information, stop type information, etc.) Information that cannot be expressed by only the binary value of the output or the L output) may be output during the fluctuation. Thereby, the hall computer 262 can acquire more detailed data regarding each pachinko machine 10. In addition, the hall computer 262 stores the notified variation type and stop type in an area for storing the game history of the pachinko machine 10, and displays the variation type and stop type for each number of changes in the display device 274. May be configured to be displayable. Thereby, the salesclerk of a hall can confirm the detailed data regarding each pachinko machine 10 at arbitrary timings.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the external output signal can be output to the external device when the power is turned on. However, the external power source is externally connected to the external device even when the power is turned off. The output may be configured so that the signal is output by switching between the single pin output mode and the multiple pin output mode even when the power is turned off.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 117. In the first to third embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 including the lottery device 700 in the configuration has been described. That is, the pachinko machine 10 in which the entrances into which game balls can be entered differ according to the direction of the sorting rotator 741 (whether it swings to the left side or to the right side) has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the second variable winning device 140 is eliminated and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. In addition, a flow path is provided inside the first variable prize-winning device 65 so that the game ball passes through to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. Whether or not can be passed is switched. The switching member 65h is configured to be switched based on the elapsed time from the start of the lottery round (eighth round), and when the game ball passes as in the first embodiment, The flow path through which the game ball can pass when the big hit is not changed.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that a part of the content of the RAM 203 is changed in the main controller 110. Moreover, in the main controller 110, a part of the startup process (see FIG. 42) and the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 47) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Further, the aspect of the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG.

  In the fourth embodiment, part of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 64) executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 is different from the hall computer 262 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 262 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 101, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the game board 13 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101, in this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the first variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view. doing.

  Next, details of the first variable winning device 65 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 102, the first variable prize winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude to the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13, and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. An LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with a base member 65c, and a first specific prize opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. An open / close unit 65f having an open / close door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g which is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 65. And a switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the game ball by projecting into the flow path formed by the flow path cover body 65g, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, and the back side of the flow path cover body 65g A back cover body 65j disposed on the back cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a back cover body 65j covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing with screws.

  FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. 103 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 103 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along the line CIIIb-CIIIb. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The first specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the lower left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 103 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 104 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed to a closed state where it is impossible to enter a ball (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to roll on the upper portion of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the open / close door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the first specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  By configuring in this way, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be efficiently used in the first specific prize opening. You can win in 65a. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 103 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CIIIa-CIIIa shown in FIG. 103 (b). As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 104, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 104 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the projection of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability game state (probability change) by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game. Gaming state). That is, the probability variation switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability variation gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state.

  In this way, since the gaming state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that won the first variable winning slot 65 during the jackpot game, the player's interest is improved even during the jackpot game. Can do. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 1 second at the shortest. . The operation of the switching member 65h is set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the eighth round. In addition, when the big hit B is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning opening 65 at the start of the eighth round.

  Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass the probability variation switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is impossible to pass the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that an excessive advantage or disadvantage does not occur.

  With reference to FIG. 104 (b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e2 will be described. FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inoperative and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability variation switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged.

  Therefore, the 8th round is started in a state where the game balls won in the round before the 8th round are not discharged, and even if it is a big hit B, it is possible to suppress the problem of winning in the probability change switch 65e3.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific prize opening 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (in this embodiment, one ball prize). 15 prize balls can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change game state can also be executed. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the rotating body flag 203j, the time counter 203k, the entrance waiting flag 203l, the large opening port flag 203m, the flow path flag 203n, the payout flag 203o, and the entrance type storage area 203p are abolished. Further, a gate passage flag 203v, a remaining ball timer flag 203w, a remaining ball timer 203x, an operation counter 203y, a probability variation valid flag 203z, a probability variation valid timer 203α, a probability variation passage counter 203β, a discharge number counter 203γ, and a winning number counter 203δ are added. Yes. Since other configurations are the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The gate passage flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3 in the eighth round of the previous jackpot. If the gate passage flag 203v is on, it indicates that the game ball has passed the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 in the previous jackpot, and if it is off, the game ball is in the probability jackpot (probability change gate) in the previous jackpot. 65e3 is not passed. This gate passage flag is set to ON together with the probability change flag 203e if the probability change setting flag is ON at the end of the jackpot (see S2121 in FIG. 113). If the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot, the probability variation flag 203e is set to off.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203w is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203w is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203w is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203x, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S4805 in FIG. 115). The remaining ball timer 203x is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for doing.

  The remaining ball timer 203x discharges the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 when one preset round ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the elapse of time. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance in the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the value of the remaining ball timer 203x reaching the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings. This is executed (see S4807 in FIG. 115). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, the impact is given at the start timing of 8 rounds, and the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, and the big hit B Even if it exists, it is possible to suppress the injustice of passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203q is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The operation counter 203y is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the eighth round, and in the big hit B, the flow solenoid 65k is set for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the eighth round. Set to on. In the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data of 8 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit B (see S4602 in FIG. 112). . On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S4709 of the winning process (see FIG. 114) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203y is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. Note that the value of the operation counter 203y is backed up when the power is turned off, and an initial value of 0 is set in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203y and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the probability variation switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The probability variation valid flag 203z is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball wins the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. is there. When the probability variation valid flag 203z is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 104 (a)) based on the flow passage solenoid 65k being ON is the probability variation switch 65e3. Indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203α is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203z described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203α, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203α is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. After that, even if the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3 is passed, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 104B), the game ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2, and the game ball is inserted into the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as winning a prize, pushing up a game ball with a piano wire or the like from below the probability changing switch (probability changing gate) 65e3, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect passing.

  The probability variation passing counter 203β is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, eight rounds with jackpot A). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the game balls won in the first variable winning slot 65 have been discharged based on the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203β and a discharge number counter 203γ described later. The probability variation passage counter 203β is incremented and updated by one when the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3 passes (see S4711 in FIG. 114). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S4811 in FIG. 115). The probability variation passing counter 203β is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The discharge number counter 203γ is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 104A) in one round. The discharged number counter 203γ is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (see S4811 in FIG. 115).

  The winning number counter 203δ is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the first specific winning port 65a in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 102) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (FIG. 114). S4703). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning (the value of the winning number counter 203δ) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharging number counter 203γ and the probability variation passing counter 203β) in the first variable winning device 65, After that, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S4811 in FIG. 115). The value of the winning number counter 203δ is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, the mode of signals output from each output channel of the external output terminal board 261 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 106, each channel (each output pin) provided on the external output terminal board 261 in a normal gaming state (from the start of the pachinko machine 10 until the power-off is detected). The types of signals output from will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the number of channels of the external output terminal plate 261 in the fourth embodiment is 13 channels, which is one channel less than the number of channels (14 channels) of the external output terminal plate 261 in the first embodiment. ing.

  Specifically, the rotating body state signal output from the CN 13 in the first embodiment is abolished, and the abnormality detection signal output from the CN 14 in the first embodiment is output from the CN 13. . This is because the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not need to notify the external device (a hall computer or the like) of the state of the sorting rotator 741 because the configuration does not include the sorting rotator 741. In addition, the content of the signal output from each channel of CN1-CN12 in 4th Embodiment is the same as the content of the signal output from each channel of CN1-CN12 in 1st Embodiment. Further, the abnormality detection signal output from the CN 13 in the fourth embodiment has the same content as the abnormality detection signal output from the CN 14 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the types of signals output from the external output terminal plate 261 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is started up and when a power interruption is detected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the contents of signals output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261. In FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 107, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the rotating body signal output from the CN 6 in the first embodiment is abolished. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not include the sorting rotator 741 in the configuration, and thus it is not necessary to notify the state of the sorting rotator 741 to an external device (such as a hall computer). In the present embodiment, the signals (the RAM initialization signal and the notification end signal) output from CN7 and CN8 in the first embodiment are output from CN6 and CN7. In other words, in this embodiment, the output channels of the RAM initialization signal and the notification end signal are allocated to younger channels one by one so that CN6 does not become an empty channel due to the elimination of the rotator signal. The contents of signals output from the channels CN1 to CN5 of the external output terminal plate 261 in the present embodiment are the signals output from the channels CN1 to CN5 of the external output terminal plate 261 in the first embodiment, respectively. Is the same.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. As described above, this start-up process is a process activated by a reset at power-on.

  Among the start-up processes (see FIG. 108) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1301 to S1309 and S1311 to S1319 are S1301 to S1309 of the start-up process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1311 to S1319 are executed. Further, in the start-up process in the fourth embodiment, when a payout return command is output to the payout control device 111 by the process in S1309 (S1309), it is executed in the start-up process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 42). Instead of the state confirmation process (see FIG. 43), the state confirmation process 2 is executed (S1341). This state confirmation process 2 (S1341) is a process for confirming whether there is any abnormality in the gaming state when the power is turned on. After executing this state confirmation process 2 (S1341), the process proceeds to S1311.

  Next, the state confirmation process 2 (S1341) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Of the status confirmation process 2 (S1341), the processes of S1401, S1402, and S1405 are the same as the processes of S1401, S1402, and S1405 of the status confirmation process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed. Further, in the state confirmation process 2 (S1341) in the present embodiment, the process in S1411 is executed instead of the processes in S1403 and S1404 in the state confirmation process in the first embodiment. In the processing of S1411, it is determined whether or not the gate passage flag 203v is on (S1411).

  Since the gate passage flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the probability variation switch (probability variation gate) 65e3 has been passed in the previous jackpot as described above, the probability variation flag 203e is off (S1402: Yes). ), It is not normally possible for the gate passage flag 203v to be turned on alone. Therefore, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the gate passage flag 203v is on, an abnormality notification is set by the process of S1405 (S1405), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gate passage flag 203v is off (S1411: No), it is determined that there is no possibility of an abnormality or fraud, and the process is terminated.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1801 to S1803 and S1805 to S1819 are respectively the processes of S1801 to S1803 and S1805 to S1819 of the main process (see FIG. 47) of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. The same process is executed.

  Also, in the main process (see FIG. 110) in the present embodiment, when the process of S1803 ends, the jackpot control process (see FIG. 48) executed in the main process in the first embodiment is substituted for. 3 is executed (S1841), and the process proceeds to S1805. Details of the jackpot control process 3 (S1841) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1841) described above. In the jackpot control process 3, in the processes of S1901, S1902, and S1905 to S1907, the same processes as the processes of S1901, S1902, and S1905 to S1907 in the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 3 in the present embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1907 that it is a new round start timing (S1907), the operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1931), and this process ends.

  This jackpot operation setting process (S1931) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1931) described above. In the jackpot operation setting process (S1931), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read (S4601). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S4601 (S4602). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S4601 (S4603), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the first variable prize-winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1907 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1907: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k (S1932). If it is determined in the processing of S1932 that it is the operation timing (S1932: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1933). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1934), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1932 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1932: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1935). Specifically, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 8th round is finished and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed, the start timing of the ending effect is determined. To do. In the process of S1935, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1935: Yes), the jackpot end process 3 for setting the jackpot end is executed (S1936), and this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 113, the jackpot end process 3 (S1936) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 3. Of the jackpot end process 3 (S1936), the processes of S2101, S2102, and S2106 are the same as the processes of S2101, S2102, and S2106 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 50) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed.

  In the jackpot end process 3 (S1936) in this embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the probability variation setting flag 203q is on (S2102: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e and the gate passage flag 203v are turned on. (S2121), and the process proceeds to S2123. On the other hand, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203q is not on (that is, is off) (S2102: No), the probability variation flag 203e and the gate passing flag 203v are set to off and the time is reduced. The value of the counter 203f is set to 50 (S2122), and the process proceeds to S2123.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203q is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203e is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 and set a high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol until the jackpot game is over. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the jackpot game to the probability change switch 65e3, a high probability state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot game. Therefore, the probability change switch (probability gate) 65e3 is set for the player in the jackpot. The game can be performed while being interested in whether or not the game ball passes.

  In the processing of S2123 executed after the processing of S2121 or S2122, the probability variation setting flag 203q and the big hit middle flag 203g are set to OFF (S2123). Next, the jackpot signal (CN12), which was set to the H output state at the start of the jackpot, is set to the L output state (S2106), and this process ends. By setting the jackpot signal to the L output state, the hall computer 262 can recognize that the jackpot has ended.

  Returning to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1935 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1935: No), then a winning process is performed in which processing corresponding to the game ball won to the first specific winning opening 65a is performed (S1937). . The winning process (S1937) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the above-described winning process (S1937). In this winning process (S1937), it is first determined whether or not it is a round valid period (S4701). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). When it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S4701: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the first specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S4702), and the detection switch 65c1 of the first specific winning opening 65a is determined. If it is determined that the game has passed (S4702: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4704. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S4702: No), the process of S4703 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4704.

  In the process of S4704, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203δ is 10 or more (S4704). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203δ is 10 or more (S4704: Yes), the first specific winning is determined. The closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the mouth 65a is set (S4706). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203w is set to ON (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203w to ON by the process of S4707, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown during the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203δ is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) has elapsed (S4705), and the round time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game has been performed (S4705: Yes), the process proceeds to S4706, and the process of closing the first specific winning opening 65a described above is executed (S4706, S4707). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S4705: No), the process proceeds to S4708.

  In the process of S4708 executed after the process of S4705 or S4707, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203y is greater than 0 (S4708), and when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203y is greater than 0 (S4708). : Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the operation counter 203y (S4709), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S4710). In the processing of S4710, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S4710: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passing counter 203β (S4711), and the probability variation setting flag 203q is set to ON. In step S4712, the process proceeds to step S4713.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4710, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S4710: No), each process of S4711 and S4712 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4713. In the process of S4713, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203y is 0 (S4713). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203y is 0 (S4713: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. (S4714). Next, the probability variation valid flag 203z is set to ON (S4715), and this process ends. Even after the switching member 65h is switched from the state shown in FIG. 104 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 104 (b) by setting the probability variation valid flag 203z to ON by the processing of S4715, the special flow path. When the game ball remaining in 65e2 passes the probability change switch 65e3, it can be controlled to set a high probability state of a special symbol. On the other hand, in the process of S4713, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203y is not 0, each process of S4714 and 4715 is skipped, and this process ends.

  In the process of S4708, when it is determined that the operation counter 203y is 0 (S4708: No), it is determined whether or not the probability variation valid flag 203z is on (S4716). In the process of S4716, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203z is off (S4716: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4716 that the probability variation valid flag 203z is on (S4716: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203α is updated by adding 1 (S4717), and the probability variation valid timer 203α after the addition is updated. Is determined to be the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S4718).

  In the process of S4718, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203α is the upper limit value (that is, a value corresponding to 1.2 s) (S4718: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203z is set to OFF (S4719), The probability variation valid timer 203α is reset to 0, which is an initial value, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4718 that the value of the probability variation valid timer 203z is not the upper limit value (that is, a value corresponding to 1.2 s) (S4718: No), the process proceeds to step S4710 and described above. The processing of S4710 to S4715 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the ball removal time. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 111, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1937) is completed, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 is illegally detected is subsequently executed (S1938), and this process is terminated. Details of this abnormality process (S1938) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S1938).

  In the abnormal process (S1938), it is first determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S4801). If it is outside the round effective period (S4801: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S4802). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S4802: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203γ is incremented by 1 (S4803), and the process proceeds to S4804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S4802: No), the process of S4803 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4804.

  In the process of S4804, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere timer flag 203w is on (S4804). If it is determined that the remaining sphere timer flag 203w is off (S4804: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203w is on (S4804: Yes), it means that the ball is being thrown away, so that the value of the remaining ball timer 203x is incremented by 1 and updated ( In S4805, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated remaining ball timer 203x is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S4805).

  In the process of S4805, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203x is not the upper limit value (S4806: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203x is the upper limit value (S4806: Yes), the number of game balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 (discharged number) and the first variable winning device. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls won to 65 (winning number) matches (S4807). Here, the discharge number is calculated by the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203β and the discharge number counter 203γ, and the winning number matches the value of the winning number counter 203δ.

In the process of S4807, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S4807: No), an error command is set (S4808), and the process proceeds to S4809. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 110) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113.
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of a winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an abnormality detection signal is output to the hall computer 262. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 even if the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the jackpot B. On the other hand, in the process of S4807, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (S4807: Yes), the process of S4808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4809.

  In the process of S4809, the remaining sphere timer flag 203w is set to OFF (S4809), and the remaining sphere timer 203x is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S4810). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203δ, the discharging number counter 203γ, and the probability variation passing counter 203β are reset to initial values (S4811), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Processing of Hall Computer in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116 and FIG. 117, various control processes executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 116, the main process executed by the control device 272 of the hall computer 262 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  Of these main processes, the processes of S3501 to S3504 and S3506 to S3508 are the same as the processes of S3501 to S3504 and S3506 to S3508 of the main process (see FIG. 64) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. In the main process in the present embodiment, when the process of S3504 is completed, a power recovery comparison process 2 is executed (S3531) instead of the power recovery comparison process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 66). Goes to S3506. Details of the power recovery comparison process 2 (S3531) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the power recovery comparison process 2 described above. This power recovery comparison process 2 (S3531) is similar to the power recovery comparison process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 66), and when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, Is a process for comparing the gaming state at the current time and the gaming state at the time of power-on this time to determine whether there is an abnormality.

  Of the power recovery comparison process 2 (S3531), in S3701 to S3708, S3710, and S3711, the same processes as S3701 to S3708, S3710, and S3711 are executed. In the power recovery comparison process 2 (S3531) according to the present embodiment, it is determined in S3707 that the power-on state is not a special symbol big hit (S3707: No), and power is turned on in S3708. When it is determined that the time state is in the high probability state of the special symbol (S3708: Yes), the game ball is then referred to and the game ball passes the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 in the previous jackpot. It is determined whether or not (S3721).

  In the process of S3721, when it is determined that the information that passed through the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 is not stored in the previous history (S3721: No), the game ball is the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 in the previous jackpot. This means that the special symbol has moved to a high probability state after the jackpot, even though it has not passed. Therefore, since there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or it has been forced to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol due to an illegal act, an abnormality notification is set (S3710) and processing Shifts to S3711.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the information that passed the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 is stored in the previous history (S3721: Yes), the game ball passed the probability change switch (probability change gate) 65e3 during the big hit. Based on the above, it is shown that the state has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that there is no possibility of abnormality or fraud, and the process of S3710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3711.

  In this manner, information corresponding to the game situation is output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 262 and stored in the predetermined area of the hard disk 273 as a game history in the hall computer 262, so that abnormality or fraud The possibility can be easily determined.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the opening operation of the switching member 65h provided inside the variable winning device 65 is varied depending on the jackpot type. As a result, a jackpot type (big hit A) that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the eighth round and a jackpot type (big hit B) that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided, and the probability change grant ratio is controlled by the jackpot type. It is configured to be able to. The pachinko machine 10 having this configuration is configured to output information corresponding to the game situation and information indicating the game state to an external device such as the hall computer 262.

  On the other hand, the hall computer 262 in the fourth embodiment is configured to grasp the game situation in real time and update the game history based on the external output signal output from the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10. Has been. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer 262 can confirm detailed information regarding each pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the hall computer 262 is configured to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has a possibility of abnormality or fraud based on information indicating the gaming state output from the pachinko machine 10. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 or when an illegal act is performed, the operator of the hall computer 262 can be recognized, so that the abnormality and the illegal action can be quickly dealt with. Can be made.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to output a signal with an H output period of 0.1 second from each of the channels CN2 to CN8 when the power is turned on and when the power is cut off. The output period is not limited to 0.1 seconds. For example, the output period may be 0.05 seconds shorter than 0.1 seconds. Thereby, since the period required for the process at the time of power-on can be shortened, the occurrence of an abnormality can be notified more quickly and the abnormality can be resolved. In addition, since the output of the information indicating the gaming state can be completed in a shorter period from the occurrence of the power interruption, the gaming state can be reduced even if the time from the occurrence of the power interruption until the power is completely shut down is shortened. The output of the indicated information can be completed. That is, the capacity of the power storage means such as a capacitor that supplies power to the main control device 110 and the like after the occurrence of power interruption can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the cost of the power storage means.

  The present embodiment is configured such that when a signal output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261 is in an H output state for a predetermined period, it is determined that various signals are output by an external device such as the hall computer 262. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the L output state and the H output state may be reversed.

  Further, the output period of signals output from the respective channels CN2 to CN8 may be longer than 0.1 seconds. By extending the output period, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can more reliably detect the signal output from each channel, so whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. More accurate determination can be made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the power-on signal is output from the CN 1, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be output from an arbitrary channel. For other channels, the correspondence between the channels and the output signals may be arbitrarily determined.

  The present embodiment is configured to output the signals having the contents shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, but the output signals are not necessarily limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 may be output to an external device. With this configuration, an external device such as the hall computer 262 can acquire information indicating whether or not a big hit is included in the variation pattern command and information indicating the variation period. Therefore, the result of the symbol variation can be determined during the symbol variation. As a result, for example, if a big hit is made after the change of the symbol is completed despite receiving the change pattern command indicating that the special symbol is off, it is possible that some fraudulent activity has been performed. Can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud and to prevent an unexpected disadvantage for the hall. Further, for example, the external output terminal plate 261 and the launch control device 112 may be electrically connected, and a signal indicating the number of game balls set for launch by the launch control device 112 may be output. As a result, the number of balls launched by the player can be compared with the number of game balls that have entered the out slot 66 and various winning holes. When an abnormality is detected such that the number of game balls that have entered the various winning openings is unnatural relative to the number of balls that have been launched, the abnormality of the hall computer 262 is notified. The pachinko machine 10 can be inspected. Therefore, fraudulent acts and malfunctions with respect to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected early.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to each of the above embodiments is configured to output an out-sphere detection signal every time 10 out-spheres are detected. However, it is not always necessary to output every 10 balls, and it is arbitrarily determined. Can do. For example, an out-sphere detection signal may be output every five balls. When the out-ball detection signal is output every 10 balls, the number of out-balls cannot be ascertained. Therefore, the number of game balls actually entered into the out-port 66 and the hall computer 262 An error of 9 balls at maximum occurs between the number of out balls and Therefore, by configuring so that an out-ball detection signal is output every number smaller than 10 balls (for example, every 5 balls), the number of game balls actually entered into the out-port 66 and the hall computer 262 It is possible to reduce the error between the number of outballs grasped by. Further, the number of game balls that enter the out port 66 before outputting the out ball detection signal may be larger than 10 (for example, every 20 balls). As a result, the frequency of outputting the out-sphere detection signal is reduced, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. For the same reason, the winning detection signal does not necessarily need to be output every time ten winning balls are detected, and can be arbitrarily determined. Further, the payout signal does not necessarily need to be output every time a payout of 10 prize balls is detected, and can be arbitrarily determined.

  In addition, the H output period of the signal output from each channel is fixed (for example, 0.1 second), and the number of times that the H output state is set within a predetermined period varies depending on the type of signal. Thus, it may be configured to be able to identify in which state the signal is output. Further, the number of times set to the H output state may be varied depending on the output channel. Thereby, it is not necessary to measure the time according to the output period of the signal, and it is only necessary to count the number of times of output, so that the processing can be simplified.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the power-on signal is fixed to the H output state while the power is set to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a mode of the power-on signal, the H output state and the L output state may be repeated in a predetermined cycle while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. That is, while the power is turned on, a rectangular wave may be output from CN1. Thereby, when the output of CN1 is fixed to the H output state due to a failure or a connection mistake, the occurrence of the failure or the connection mistake can be determined. In addition, the predetermined condition is established for the mode of the signal set to the H output state while the predetermined condition is satisfied, such as the first large opening operation signal and the second large opening operation signal. In the meantime, it may be changed to a rectangular wave having a predetermined period. Further, instead of the rectangular wave, a sine wave, a triangular wave, a sawtooth wave, or the like may be output.

  In each of the above embodiments, each channel of the external output terminal plate 261 has two types of states, that is, an H output state (that is, an output is 5 volts) or an L output state (that is, an output is 0 volts). By setting the status, various information is notified to an external device such as the hall computer 262. However, the output of each channel is not limited to two types, and more than two types of output may be performed. . For example, you may comprise so that it can set to three states, the state of 0 volts, the state of 2.5 volts, and the state of 5 volts. For example, a signal of 2.5 volts is output while the power is turned on from CN1, and a winning (start winning prize) is given to the first entrance 64 while the power is turned on. ) Is detected, the output of CN1 may be set to 5 volts for 0.2 seconds. Thereby, information indicating whether or not the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and information on the start winning prize can be output in one channel. Therefore, since the number of output channels of the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced, the number of parts of the external output terminal plate 261 can be reduced. Therefore, it can suppress that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 rises.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, various signals output from the pachinko machine 10 are configured to be input to the hall computer 262 via the table management device 263, the island management device 264, and the relay device 265. It is not limited. For example, a signal may be input directly from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 262. As a result, it is possible to prevent the signal output from the pachinko machine 10 from being altered in the process of passing through each external device and causing the hall computer 262 to store erroneous data. Further, some of the table management device 263, the island management device 264, and the relay device 265 may be omitted. For example, the island management device 264 may include the function of the relay device 265, and the relay device 265 may be omitted. Thereby, the capital investment amount of a hall | hole and an electricity bill can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the signal is output from each channel of the external output terminal plate 261 in parallel, but the signal may be output in serial. For example, the output channels of the external output terminal plate 261 are three types CN1 to CN3, a power-on signal is output from CN1, signals corresponding to various signals are output from CN2, and output from CN2 is output from CN3. A signal (clock) indicating what kind of data is to be output may be output.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, the signal output from the external output device 261 in the normal gaming state is a signal (see FIG. 22) for notifying information according to the gaming situation. It is not limited. For example, when it is detected that the game is stopped (a state in which the player does not operate the handle 51 of the pachinko machine 10) or that a demonstration is being performed, information indicating the game state may be output. Good. In this case, information indicating the game state may be output periodically or irregularly until the game stop state or the state during the demonstration effect is canceled. The hall computer 262 may be configured to determine whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed by comparing with the previous reception result every time information indicating the gaming state is received. . If the game state changes while the game is stopped or during the demonstration production, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or an illegal act has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. By repeatedly confirming, it is possible to quickly detect and respond to abnormal operations and fraudulent acts.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, when a game ball enters the probability variation entrance ball opening (first to third embodiments) or when the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 (fourth embodiment). The high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the stage where the jackpot is won, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (that is, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the state after the jackpot ends is determined in advance) In the pachinko machine 10, the external output terminal board 261 may be configured to output information corresponding to the game situation or information indicating the game state to the external device.

  In each of the above embodiments, the hall computer 262 determines the number of pachinko machines based on the individual identification information of the island management device 264 output from the island management device 264 and the information of the connection terminal to which the pachinko machine 10 is connected. Although it has been configured to be able to determine whether an external output signal is output from the machine 10, outputting the information for identifying the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the island management device 264. For example, the relay device 265 may be configured to generate information that can identify the individual of the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal and output the information to the hall computer 262. Moreover, you may comprise so that the individual identification information for identifying each pachinko machine 10 may be output from the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Thereby, when connecting the pachinko machine 10 to each connection terminal of the island management device 264, even if the connection terminal to be connected is incorrect, an external output signal is output based on the individual identification information output from the pachinko machine 10. Individuals can be accurately identified. Moreover, you may comprise so that the stand management apparatus 263 may output the individual identification information which can identify the individual of the stand management apparatus 263. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 that has output the external output signal to the hall computer 262 can be accurately determined without increasing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

  In each of the above embodiments, a RAM initialization signal is output from a dedicated output channel in order to notify an external device such as the hall computer 262 that power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. However, it is not always necessary to output the RAM initialization signal from the dedicated output channel. In the first embodiment, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment, the power-on signal (CN1) may be output including information indicating whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. For example, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the power-on signal (CN1) is started, the power-on signal (CN1) is set to the L output state for a certain period, and the power-on signal (CN1) is again output as H. By setting this state, it may be configured to notify that the RAM erase switch 122 has been pressed. That is, an L output period of a certain period is set from when the output of the power-on signal (CN1) is started to when the output of the power-on signal (CN1) is stopped based on detection of power-off. If so, the RAM erase switch 122 may be pressed to indicate that the power is turned on, and if the L output state is not set, the RAM erase switch 122 may not be pressed. . Similarly, in the second embodiment, for example, after a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the power supply state signal (CN1) is set to the H output state, for a certain period of time. The power supply state signal (CN1) may be set to the L output state. This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated channel for outputting the RAM initialization signal, so that other information can be output. Therefore, more information can be notified to an external device such as the hall computer 262. In addition, the period for setting CN1 to the L output state is a sufficiently short period (for example, 1 ms) that cannot be realized by the instantaneous power interruption so that it can be distinguished from the case where the power supply is instantaneously turned off by the instantaneous power interruption or the like. It is good. As a result, the hall computer 262 clearly distinguishes between when CN1 is in the L output state due to a momentary power failure and when CN1 is in the L output state when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. can do.

  In each of the above embodiments, the external output signal can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an internal power source such as a primary battery or a secondary battery may be provided for the pachinko machine 10 so that an external output signal can be output even after the supply of power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted. As a result, fraudulent acts are performed while the power is shut off. For example, even if the jackpot is forcibly set, the fact that the jackpot is set is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 261. Therefore, it is possible to make the hall computer 262 recognize that an illegal act has been performed earlier.

  Moreover, you may combine all or one part of each above-mentioned embodiment and each control example, respectively.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Feature A group> (Informs Horcon whether the gaming machine is powered on or off)
Game information is stored, storage means capable of holding the stored information for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off, and control related to the game can be executed based on the game information stored in the storage means Control means, and a signal output means capable of outputting a power-on signal indicating that power is supplied to the gaming machine to an external device that performs predetermined processing based on a signal received from the gaming machine, When the output of the power-on signal is stopped by the signal output means, a stop that can output a game information signal corresponding to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means to the external device A time output means and a start time output means capable of outputting the game information signal to the external device when the output of the power-on signal is started by the signal output means. Game machine A1 to be characterized.

  Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that outputs information about a game to an external device such as a hall computer (for example, Japanese Patent No. 3848105). In such a gaming machine, a signal indicating the winning of the jackpot, a signal indicating the start of symbol variation, a signal indicating that the prize ball has been paid out, etc. are output to the outside by outputting a signal according to the game situation. It is possible to cause the apparatus to grasp the status of the game being performed in the gaming machine. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the gaming machine is turned off while the power of the gaming machine is cut off, it is difficult for the external device to recognize the wronging action. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, game information is stored by the storage means, and the stored information is held for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Based on the game information stored in the storage unit, the control unit controls the game. When a power-on signal indicating that power is supplied to the gaming machine is output to an external device by the signal output means, and the output of the power-on signal is stopped by the signal output means, the storage means A game information signal corresponding to at least a part of the stored game information is output to the external device by the stop time output means. When the output of the power-on signal is started by the signal output means, the game information signal is output to the external device by the start time output means.

  Thus, based on the game information signal output based on the output of the power-on signal being stopped to the external device and the game information signal output based on the output of the power-on signal being started. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not an illegal act has been performed while the power of the gaming machine is shut off. In other words, since it is possible to determine the presence or absence of cheating based on power-on, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the state where the cheating is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the hall from being damaged by an illegal act on the gaming machine.

  Also, based on the game information signal output to the external device when the output of the power-on signal is stopped and the game information signal output based on the start of the output of the power-on signal. It is possible to determine whether or not the state has changed while the power source of the gaming machine is shut off. Therefore, there is an effect that the external device can accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A1, the game information indicated by the game information signal is from the end of the output of the game information signal by the start time output means until the output of the power-on signal is stopped. A gaming machine A2 comprising game information output means capable of outputting signals corresponding to different game information.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the game information signal is output between the time when the output of the game information signal by the start time output means is finished and the time when the output of the power-on signal is stopped. Since the signal corresponding to the game information different from the game information shown is output by the game information output means, more game information can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that the external device can grasp more detailed information of the gaming machine.

  In either the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is provided with an ending signal output means capable of outputting an ending signal indicating that the output of the gaming information signal has ended to the external device.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, an end signal indicating that the output of the gaming information signal has ended is output to the external device by the end signal output means, so that the external device receives it. It is possible to prevent the received signal from being mistaken as another signal. Therefore, there is an effect that the external device can grasp the game information of the gaming machine more accurately.

  In the gaming machine A3, the game information signal is output using a part or all of an output channel group composed of a plurality of output channels, and the end signal is the game in the output channel group. A gaming machine A4, which is output using one output channel from which a part of the information signal is output.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, a gaming information signal is output using a part or all of an output channel group composed of a plurality of output channels, and the gaming information signal is output. An end signal is output using one output channel of the output channel group.

  As a result, the end signal can be output to the external device without increasing the output channel group, so that the unit price of the output channel group can be suppressed from increasing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming information signal output from the output channel from which the termination signal is output has a signal output period different from that of the termination signal.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A4, the gaming information signal output from the output channel from which the end signal is output is different from the end signal in the output period of the signal. On the other hand, it is determined that the game information signal is output by the external device in spite of outputting the end signal or the game device outputs the game information signal from the gaming machine to the external device. It is possible to suppress that it is determined that is output. Therefore, there is an effect that the external device can grasp the game information of the gaming machine more accurately.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game information stored in the storage means includes state transition means for shifting the state to a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine A6 includes bonus game information indicating whether or not the game is in the bonus game state, and the game information signal includes information corresponding to the bonus game information. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the state is shifted to the privilege gaming state advantageous to the player by the state shifting means. In addition, bonus game information indicating whether or not the game is in a bonus game state is stored in the storage means, and information corresponding to the bonus game information is included in the game information signal.

  As a result, even if the state is illegally shifted to the privilege gaming state while the power is cut off, the game information signal that is output based on the next output of the power-on signal is The device can be made to recognize fraud. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress a player from playing a game by an unauthorized player in a state where the player is illegally shifted to the privilege gaming state, it is possible to suppress damage to the hall due to an unauthorized act. effective.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a counting means for counting the number of valuable objects paid out by the payout means, The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the gaming information output means outputs information corresponding to the number of valuable objects counted by the counting means to at least the external device.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the specific condition, a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out to the player by the payout means, and the number of valuable objects paid out by the payout means is counted by the counting means. Further, information corresponding to the number of valuable objects counted by the counting means is output to the external device by the game information output means.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the external device know the number of valuable objects paid out by the payout means. Therefore, there is an effect that the external device can calculate sales based on the number of valuable objects and can detect abnormal payout.

<Characteristic B group> (Power-on signal and off-signal are notified to the Horcon with one pin, and during normal game, the one pin is used to output information about the game)
From the input information output means, the input information output means for outputting the input notification information for notifying the power-on based on the power-on to the external device that performs the predetermined processing based on the signal received from the gaming machine A gaming machine B1 comprising: output control means capable of causing the insertion information output means to output predetermined information different from the insertion notification information when the insertion notification information is not output.

  Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that outputs information about a game to an external device such as a hall computer (for example, Japanese Patent No. 3848105). In such a gaming machine, a signal indicating the winning of the jackpot, a signal indicating the start of symbol variation, a signal indicating that the prize ball has been paid out, etc. are output to the outside by outputting a signal according to the game situation. It is possible to cause the apparatus to grasp the status of the game being performed in the gaming machine. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the gaming machine is turned off while the power of the gaming machine is cut off, it is difficult for the external device to recognize the wronging action. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, power-on notification information for notifying power-on based on power-on is output to the external device by the power-information output means, and the power-notification information is output from the power-information output means. If not, the output control unit controls the predetermined information different from the input information to be output from the input information output unit.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that an external device that has received different predetermined information can recognize the presence or absence of an illegal act on the gaming machine based on the predetermined information.

  The gaming machine B1 includes power-off information output means for outputting power-off notification information for notifying the external device of power-off based on power-off, and the predetermined information includes the input notification information It is different from the power interruption notification information, and the output control means is configured to output the power supply information output means and the power interruption information output means when neither the power supply notification information nor the power interruption notification information is output. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the predetermined information can be output from at least one of them.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the power interruption notification information for notifying the power interruption based on the power interruption is output to the external device by the power interruption information output means. Further, the predetermined information is configured by information different from the insertion notification information and the power interruption notification information. When neither the closing notification information nor the power interruption notification information is output, predetermined information is output from at least one of the charging information output means and the power interruption information output means by the output control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the external device from misidentifying the predetermined information and the insertion notification information or the power interruption notification information.

  In the gaming machine B2, game information is stored, storage means capable of holding the stored information for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off, and a game based on the game information stored in the storage means Control means for controlling the game, and a game information signal corresponding to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means based on output of the insertion notification information from the insertion information output means. An on-time output means for outputting to the device, and an on-power output means for outputting the game information signal to the external device based on the output of the power interruption notification information from the power interruption information output means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, game information is stored in the storage means, and the stored information is retained for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. A game information signal corresponding to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means based on the output of the insertion notification information from the input information output means is output to the external device by the output means at the time of input. Based on the fact that the power interruption notification information is output from the power interruption information output means, a game information signal is output to the external device by the power interruption output means.

  As a result, the power was turned on based on the game information signal output based on the output of the power interruption notification information and the game information signal output based on the output of the input notification information. At this time, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been cheated while the power is cut off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized player from playing a game illegally.

  In the gaming machine B3, the output control means controls to output the insertion notification information, the game information signal, and the power interruption notification information from the insertion information output means. Machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B3, the output control means controls the insertion information output means, the game information signal, and the power interruption notification information to be output from the insertion information output means. A plurality of pieces of information can be output to an external device without increasing the output means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the scale of the gaming machine and to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine B4, the output control means outputs game information corresponding to the game information signal from when the game information signal is output to when a power interruption occurs based on the output of the input notification information. A gaming machine B5, which is controllable to output information corresponding to game information different from that to the external device.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the gaming information signal corresponds to the gaming information signal from when the gaming information signal is output to when the power interruption occurs based on the output of the notification information. Since the information corresponding to the game information different from the game information is controlled to be output to the external device by the output control means, more information can be output to the external device. Therefore, there is an effect that the external device can grasp more detailed information about the gaming machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, a state transition means for shifting the state to a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition is provided, and the gaming information signal is the privilege gaming state. A gaming machine B6, which includes information indicating whether or not.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the state is shifted to the privilege gaming state advantageous to the player by the state shifting means. Further, information indicating whether or not the game state is a privilege game state is included in the game information signal.

  As a result, the power was turned on based on the game information signal output based on the output of the power interruption notification information and the game information signal output based on the output of the input notification information. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act of illegally shifting the state to the privilege gaming state is performed while the power is cut off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent unexpected damage to the hall by playing the game with the gaming machine illegally shifted to the privilege gaming state.

<Characteristic C group> (At the time of start-up, a period for separately outputting information with a single pin and a period for outputting information with a composite of a plurality of pins are set)
Information output means configured to include a plurality of output units for outputting information to an external device that performs predetermined processing based on information output from the gaming machine, and a plurality of outputs included in the information output means Single information output means for outputting individual information that is individual information from each section, and composite information that is information output using two or more output sections among a plurality of output sections of the information output means Composite information output means, wherein the information output means outputs a period for outputting the single information by the single information output means and a period for outputting the composite information by the composite information output means in a predetermined period. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that is set at least.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have external output means for outputting information about games to an external device such as a hall computer (for example, Japanese Patent No. 3848105). In such a gaming machine, a signal corresponding to the situation of the game, such as a signal indicating that the jackpot has been won, a signal indicating the start of symbol variation, a signal indicating that the prize ball has been paid out, etc. from each outside of the external output means By outputting them individually, information about a plurality of games can be notified in parallel to the external device. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the information output from each output unit is limited to the contents that can be expressed in two states of signal on and off, so the amount of information to be notified to the external device is small. It was restricted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, information is output to an external device by a plurality of output units included in the information output unit, and individual information that is individual information is output from the plurality of output units. It is controlled by single information output means. Further, the composite information output means controls so that composite information that is information output using two or more output units among the plurality of output units is output. During a predetermined period, the information output unit sets a period for outputting the single information by the single information output unit and a period for outputting the composite information by the composite information output unit.

  Thereby, single information and composite information can be output from the information output means in a predetermined period. Therefore, there is an effect that more detailed information can be output to the external device without increasing the output unit.

  In the gaming machine C1, the information output means sends the unit information and the external information to an external device that performs a predetermined process based on a signal received from the gaming machine until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. A gaming machine C2 that is capable of outputting composite information.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the information output means outputs the single information and the composite information to the external device until the predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, more types of information can be output to the external device.

  In the gaming machine C2, game information is stored, storage means capable of holding the stored information for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off, and a game based on the game information stored in the storage means Control means for performing control relating to the game, wherein the single information corresponds to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means, and the composite information is stored in the storage means The gaming machine C3 is information corresponding to at least a part of the game information and corresponding to game information different from the game information corresponding to the single information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, game information is stored in the storage means, and the information stored in the storage means is held for a predetermined time after the power is turned off. Based on the game information stored in the storage unit, the control unit controls the game. Further, single information corresponds to at least a part of game information stored in the storage means, and composite information corresponds to game information different from game information corresponding to the single information.

  Thereby, since more game information can be output to the external device, there is an effect that the external device can grasp more detailed information of the gaming machine.

  In either the gaming machine C2 or C3, identification information for identifying whether it is a period for outputting the unit information or a period for outputting the composite information in the predetermined period is output to the external device. A gaming machine C4, comprising an identification information output means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine C2 or C3, identification information indicating whether it is a period for outputting single information or a period for outputting composite information in a predetermined period is identified. Since the information is output to the external device by the information output means, there is an effect that the external device can accurately discriminate between the single information and the composite information.

  In the gaming machine C4, the identification information is output from a part of the plurality of output units included in the information output means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the identification information is output from some of the plurality of output units included in the information output means, so that the identification information is not increased without increasing the number of output units. Can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the scale of the information output means and suppress an increase in cost of the gaming machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and when the lottery means obtains a predetermined lottery result, the state is changed to a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player. A state transition means for transitioning, and the information output means sends the single information and the composite information to the external device from when the lottery means reaches a predetermined lottery result until the privilege gaming state ends. A gaming machine C6 that is capable of outputting information.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the predetermined lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the state is shifted to the privilege gaming state advantageous to the player by the state shifter. . Then, the single information and the composite information are output to the external device by the information output means from when the predetermined lottery result is obtained by the lottery means until the bonus game state is ended.

  Thereby, since more information regarding a privilege game state can be output to an external device, there exists an effect that the detailed information regarding a privilege game state can be grasped | ascertained with respect to an external device.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the unit information has a smaller information amount than the composite information.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since the single information has a smaller information amount than the composite information, a plurality of information having different information amounts can be output to the external device. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be output to the external device.

<Characteristic D group> (structure of an accessory for confirming probability change for two times)
Previous to a entrance where a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter, and either the first area or the second area Distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball mouth, and based on the game balls entering the first area, the player is more likely than the game balls entering the second area In the gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the first game, the distribution means is in a first state in which game balls can be distributed to the first region, and to the first region or the second region. A variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game balls can be distributed, and a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game balls can pass in the first state. And a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which a game ball can pass in the second state. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the variable means changes the sorting means from the first state to the second state, and the game ball passes through the third flow path. In this case, the gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine D1, by the variable means, the distribution means can distribute the game balls to the first state or the second region where the game balls can be distributed to the first region. The state is changed to the second state. In the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. . Here, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, the state of the sorting means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, The state of the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state by the variable means. As a result, if the distribution means is changed to the first state, in the next distribution performed by the distribution means, the game ball will be distributed to the first area and transferred to the special game state. Can be recognized. Therefore, from the time when the allocating means is changed to the first state, until the next time the allocating means performs the distribution, the player is given a sense of security and satisfaction with regard to the transition to the special gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be performed while holding.

  In the gaming machine D1, the third flow path is to allow a passed game ball to enter the first area, and the fourth flow path is to allow the passed game ball to enter the second area. A gaming machine D2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the first area, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the second area, so if the game ball passes through the third flow path, Then, the game ball enters the first area and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the distribution means changes to the first state. Therefore, since it is possible to continuously shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, for a player who has recognized that the gaming ball has shifted to the special gaming state based on passing through the third flow path Thus, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction with the continuous special gaming state can be provided.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the variable means can change the state of the sorting means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the state of the allocating means is varied by the variable means based on the weight of the game ball that passes, the state of the allocating means can be varied by a natural operation by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from being changed at an unnatural timing and causing the player to feel distrust with the gaming machine or the hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the variable means includes a variable suppression means that suppresses a change in the state of the allocating means in a state in which no game ball is passing therethrough.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the switching of the state of the allocating means in a state where the game ball is not passing is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, the allocating means is the first at a timing different from the timing when the allocating means is varied by the variable means. It can be suppressed that the state is switched to the second state, causing damage to the player or causing distrust to the gaming machine or the hall.

<Characteristic E group> (Performs a display effect according to the state of the flow path and structure for the twice loop)
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not to win, the display unit for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit, and the effect of the identification information displayed on the display unit The privilege mode executing means for specifying the mode, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player after the identification information indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is displayed, and the privilege game executing means After the game is executed, the game state specifying means for specifying whether the game state to be executed is a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state And a continuation setting means for setting the gaming state specifying means to a continuation state in which the second gaming state is easily specified a plurality of times, and the continuation state by the continuation setting means. If set, the fall setting means for ending the set continuation state and setting the fall state in which the first game state is easily specified by the gaming state specifying means, and the continuation setting means And an effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means based on whether the continuation state is set or whether the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. A gaming machine E1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E1, the continuation setting means sets the gaming state specifying means to a continuation state in which it is easy to specify the second gaming state continuously several times. When the gaming state specifying unit is set to the continuing state, the continuing state is ended by the falling setting unit, and the first gaming state is set to the falling state in which the first gaming state is easily specified. Here, the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying unit is changed by the effect mode changing unit based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting unit or the fall state is set by the fall state setting unit. The Thus, the player can determine whether or not the current state is the continuation state only by confirming the presentation mode displayed on the display means, so that the mode indicating the continuation state is displayed as the presentation mode. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is easily specified a plurality of times in succession.

  In the gaming machine E1, after the identification information indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is displayed and before the execution of the special game by the special game execution unit is ended, the game state specifying unit specifies Suggestion display control means for controlling the display means to display a suggestion effect indicating a state, the suggestion display control means suggesting that the specific result by the gaming state identification means is the second gaming state Display control based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting unit or the fall state is set by the tumbling state setting unit. A gaming machine E2 characterized by specifying a suggestion effect to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the display effect indicating that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state is displayed on the display means, the indication indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is indicated by the suggestion display control means. After the information is displayed, and before the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means is finished, the display means is controlled so as to display a suggestive effect suggesting the state specified by the gaming state specifying means. Therefore, by displaying the suggestion effect on the display means, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is easily identified multiple times in succession. . In addition, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the hope that the suggestion effect is displayed on the display means during the bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine E2, the continuation setting means sets the continuation state when the specific result by the gaming state specification means is the second gaming state, the gaming machine E3,

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state, the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means, so that when the continuation state is reached, the second game state is passed. Since it is possible to prevent the first game state from being changed to the first game state after the game state specifying unit first performs the determination after the continuation state, the player continues the first game state. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game before being identified by the game state identifying means first.

  In the gaming machine E3, the suggestion display control means can suggest that the continuation setting means has set the continuation state in the suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the suggestion effect, the suggestion display control means suggests that the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means, so that the player can easily recognize that the continuation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the second gaming state has become a state that is easily specified a plurality of times by being set to the continuous state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

<Characteristic F group> (two-stage sorting during probability variation lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on whether or not the winning / failing determination unit performs a determination of whether or not to win and the result of the determination of whether or not the winning / failing unit has determined. After the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and the bonus game executing means, the gaming state to be executed is the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In the gaming machine having the game state specifying means for specifying which state of the game state, the gaming state specifying means is based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery, A first game state and a second game state are respectively specified, and as the first lottery, a first specific state in which the first game state is more easily specified than the second game state; The first specific state The second specific state is set as the first lottery means for lottering which one of the second specific state in which the second gaming state is likely to be specified is set, and the second lottery. In this case, the gaming machine F1 further includes second lottery means for lottering whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine F1, based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are respectively specified by the gaming state specifying means. Then, as the first lottery, a first specific state where the first gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state, and a second state where the second gaming state is more easily specified than the first specific state. Which one of the specific states is set is drawn by the first lottery means. Here, as the second lottery, even when the second specific state is set, the second lottery means determines whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state. Is done. Thereby, in the specification of one game state by the game state specifying means, two lottery opportunities of the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are given. You can feel that you have more opportunities. Moreover, even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, it is expected that the lottery result for setting the special state by the second lottery means without discouraging the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the state specification by the game state specifying means can be fully enjoyed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second lottery means draws whether or not to set a special state at the next specification by the game state specifying means based on the specification by the gaming state specifying means. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the specification by the game state specifying means, the second lottery means determines whether or not to set a special state at the time of specification by the next game state specifying means. Thereby, even if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, if it is lottery to be set to the special state by the second lottery means, the first specification is made by the first lottery means. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player with respect to the fact that the state has been drawn, and it is possible to make the game look forward to being specified in the special state at the time of specification by the next game state specifying means. In addition, if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the second specific state, and the lottery result by the second lottery means indicates the special state, the state advantageous to the player is continued. Since the player can recognize, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming state specifying means is based on the entrance of a game ball into which a game ball can enter and the game ball that has entered the entrance of the game. Based on the first area specified that the gaming state executed after execution of the bonus game is the first gaming state, and the gaming ball entering the entrance enters the bonus A second area that specifies that the gaming state to be executed after the bonus game is executed by the game execution means is the second gaming state, and the first lottery and the second lottery to the entrance A gaming machine F3 that determines whether to guide the game ball to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the game ball that has entered.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the game ball entering the entrance opening entering the first area, the game state executed after execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is set to the first game state. It is specified by specifying means. Then, based on the game ball that has entered the entrance opening into the second area, the game state that is executed after the scoring game is executed by the privilege game execution means is set to the second game state. It is specified by specifying means. Here, it is determined by the first lottery and the second lottery whether the game ball is guided to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the game ball that has entered the entrance. Thereby, there is an effect that the player can easily determine the result of the lottery by the first lottery and the second lottery only by confirming the flow direction of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine F3, the second lottery means draws whether or not to set a special state based on the distribution of game balls to the first area or the second area. F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the distribution to the first area or the second area, whether or not to set a special state is drawn by the second lottery means, so that the player performs the lottery timing performed by the second lottery means The effect is that it can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine F4, in the special state, the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can pass, and in the special state, the passage of the game ball is restricted. The second lottery means determines to set the special state when a game ball has passed through the third flow path, and the second flow path. The game machine F5 is characterized in that when the game ball passes through, it is determined to release the special state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the special state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path. And when it is in a special state, it is restricted that a game ball passes the 3rd passage and the 4th passage. Here, when the game ball passes through the third flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means to set the special state. Further, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is released. Thus, the player can determine that the game ball has passed through the third flow path by simply confirming that the game ball has passed through the third flow path. There is an effect that the player can be allowed to play the game while having a sense of security and satisfaction with the specification in the special state in the next specification by the game state specifying means.

  In the gaming machine F5, the third flow path allows a passed game ball to enter the second area, and the fourth flow path allows a passed game ball to enter the first area. A gaming machine F6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the second area, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the first area, so that the player passes through the third flow path. By recognizing this, it is possible to recognize that the transition to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and that the next lottery performed by the second lottery means is performed in the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who recognizes that the game ball has passed through the third flow path can be given a great satisfaction and a sense of security with respect to the continuous advantageous state.

<Characteristic G group> (suppresses that two or more game balls enter the distribution means)
Previous to a entrance where a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter, and either the first area or the second area A distribution unit that distributes the game balls that have entered the entry ball port, and a switching unit that switches to a ball entry permission state that permits a game ball to enter the ball entrance for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a predetermined condition; And a transition means for making a transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when a game ball has entered the second area based on the game ball having entered the first area. And the allocating means can be varied between a first state where game balls can be distributed to the first area and a second state where game balls can be easily distributed to the second area. Variable game means, and one game ball that has entered the entrance has reached the sorting means. In addition, the gaming machine G1 is provided with a restricting means for restricting a game ball that has entered the entrance after the game ball from reaching the distributing means at least while the entrance is permitted. .

  According to the gaming machine G1, the game balls that have entered the entrance are distributed to either the first area or the second area by the distributing means, and the game balls are delivered to the entrance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The entry is permitted by the switching means for a predetermined period. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first area, the game state is shifted to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball has entered the second area. . Further, the variable means changes the distribution means into a first state where the game balls can be distributed to the first area and a second state where the game balls can be easily distributed to the second area. Here, when one game ball that has entered the entrance reaches the distribution means, it is at least that the game ball that has entered the entrance after the game ball reaches the distribution means. While the ball is permitted, it is restricted by the restricting means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that two or more game balls are distributed to the first area or the second area by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from being distributed to different areas in one distribution and causing a malfunction of the game machine.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a determination unit that determines whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the determination result of the determination unit is a predetermined result, a restriction that releases the restriction by the restriction unit A gaming machine G2 comprising a release means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. In other words, whether or not a lottery condition is satisfied is determined by the determination unit. Then, when the result of the determination by the determination unit is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction unit is released by the restriction release unit. Thereby, every time the determination result by the success / failure determination means becomes a predetermined result, the distribution by the distribution means can be performed, so the player can determine the result of the determination by the validity determination means and the distribution by the distribution means. The result can be confirmed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 is provided with a discharging means for discharging the game ball restricted from reaching the sorting means by the limiting means to the outside of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the game ball restricted from reaching the distributing means by the restricting means is discharged out of the game area by the discharging means, the game ball restricted from reaching the distributing means remains in the game area, It is possible to suppress the remaining game ball from being used as it is in the next sorting by the sorting means. As a result, each time the sorting by the sorting means is performed, the player can be made to launch the game ball at the entrance, so that the sorting by the sorting means can be performed at the player's favorite timing. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the variable means is configured such that the game ball that has entered the entrance by the distributing means is distributed to one of the first area and the second area. Based on the above, the gaming machine G4 is characterized in that it can be changed to either the first state or the second state.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the entrance is distributed to either the first area or the second area by the distributing means, the distributing means is changed to the first state and the second state by the variable means. It can be changed to either one of the states. Since the timing for switching the state of the distribution means is determined, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing for switching the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine G4, variable suppression means that suppresses the variable means from being changed to one of the first state and the second state when the game ball has not reached the distribution means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by the provision.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable suppression means suppresses the variable means from changing to one of the first state and the second state when the game ball has not reached the distribution means. As a result, the allocating means switches from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing at which the allocating means is varied by the variable means, causing damage to the player, There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the distrust.

<Characteristic H group> (switch the flow path at the timing of the attacker)
The entrance where the game ball enters and the state of the entrance are set to the entrance permission state where the game ball is easy to enter and the entrance restriction state where the entrance of the game ball is restricted. A gaming machine that is provided with a bonus game advantageous to a player by being switched to the entrance-permitted state by the entrance entrance setting means based on establishment of a predetermined condition. It is advantageous for the player when a game ball enters compared to a first area where a game ball entering the ball opening can enter and a game ball entering the first area. The second area and the second path through which the game ball that has entered the entrance has traveled are more likely to travel to the first path or the second area than the first flow path. The distribution means for distributing to the flow path, and the state of the distribution means, based on the progress of the bonus game, State setting means for setting at least once each of a first state in which the game balls are distributed to the first flow path and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path; In the bonus game, as the setting contents for setting the state of the entrance by the entrance setting means, the entrance permission state is set when the state setting means sets the first state. Selecting means for selecting one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least one setting content and a second setting content in which the entrance permission state is set when the second state is set; A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine H1, the flow path in which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance advances is changed to the first flow path or the second area from the first flow path by the distributing means. It distributes to the 2nd channel which is easy to advance. The state of the distribution means is divided into a first state in which the game balls are distributed to the first flow path by the state setting means and a second state in which the game balls are distributed to the second flow path based on the progress status of the privilege game. Set at least once. The first setting content in which the entrance permission state is set when the state setting unit sets the first state as the setting content for setting the entrance state by the entrance setting unit in one privilege game. When the second state is set, one setting content is selected by the selection means from a plurality of setting content including at least the second setting content for which the entrance permission state is set.

  As a result, when the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, the game ball that has entered the entrance has progressed to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, the player can play a game by his / her favorite game method. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, the selection means is for selecting either the first setting content or the second setting content, the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E1, either the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means. The game ball that has entered the mouth can be advanced to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, since the player can play the game with his / her favorite game method, the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy about the game.

  The gaming machine H1 or H2 includes lottery means for lottering whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and the selection means performs the second setting when the lottery by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine H3, which selects contents.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained is drawn by the lottery means, and when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the second setting content is selected by the selection means. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the entry permission state is set in the first state or the second state. Therefore, according to the lottery content by the lottery means, there is an effect that various playability can be realized according to the ratio at which the entrance permission state is set in the second state.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the first area or the second area, and the game balls that have passed through the second flow path are assigned to the second area. A gaming machine H4, characterized by comprising an area distribution means for distributing the game to each other.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the first area or the second area by the area distribution means, Since the game balls that have passed through the two flow paths are distributed to the second area by the area allocating means, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is advantageous for the player simply by checking the flow paths through which the game balls pass. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine H4, the area allocating means distributes the game ball that has passed through the first flow path to the first area, and the game ball that has passed through the first flow path is the first distribution state. Variable means that can be changed to a second distribution state that is distributed to two regions, and a game ball that has passed through the first flow path is allowed to pass in the first distribution state. One passage, a second passage through which the game ball that has passed through the second flow path can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the first flow path when in the second distribution state. A third passage and a fourth passage through which the game ball that has passed through the second flow path can pass, and the variable means is configured such that when the game ball passes through the second passage, The distribution means is varied from the first distribution state to the second distribution state, and the game ball passes through the third passage. Gaming machine H5, characterized in that if, in which varying the area distributing means to said first sorting condition from said second distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the gaming machine is divided into a first distribution state in which game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the first area, and a second distribution state in which game balls that have passed through the first flow path are distributed to the second area. The state of is variable. In the first distribution state, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path pass through the first passage, and the game balls that have passed through the second flow path pass through the second passage. In the second distribution state, the game balls that have passed through the first flow path pass through the third passage, and the game balls that have passed through the second flow path pass through the fourth passage. When the game ball passes through the second passage, the region distribution means is changed by the variable means from the first distribution state to the second distribution state, and when the game ball passes through the third passage, The area allocating means is changed by the variable means from the allocating state to the first allocating state.

  As a result, if the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state, the game balls are distributed to the second area in the next distribution performed by the area distribution means, which is advantageous for the player. The player can be made aware. Therefore, from the time when the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state until the next distribution by the area distribution means, there is a sense of security and satisfaction with respect to being advantageous to the player. There is an effect that the game can be performed while holding.

  In the gaming machine H5, the first passage is for allowing the passed game ball to enter the first region, and the second passage is for allowing the passed game ball to enter the second region. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H5, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passage enters the first area, and the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage enters the second area. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the second passage, the game ball enters the second area and becomes advantageous to the player, and the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state. The In the second distribution state, the game balls are distributed to the second region by the region distribution means, so that it is possible for the player to recognize that the player continuously shifts to a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of security and satisfaction with respect to continuous advantageous states.

  In the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first flow path is located closer to the front side than the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first flow path is located on the front side of the second flow path, so that compared to the case where the game ball travels on the near side, It is advantageous for the player to proceed on the side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally attracted to the near side using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the fraudulent person, so that the fraudulent act can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H7, the first passage is located on the front side of the second passage, and the third passage is located on the front side of the fourth passage. A gaming machine H8.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first passage is located on the near side with respect to the second passage and the third passage is located on the near side with respect to the fourth passage, even if the first distribution state is in the second distribution state, However, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball passes through the passage located on the back side than the game ball passes through the passage located on the front side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally attracted to the near side using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the fraudulent person, so that the fraudulent act can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the game machine includes information acquisition means for periodically acquiring elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time since the bonus game was started, and the distribution means is Based on the acquired elapsed time information, the game machine H9 is characterized in that the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path. .

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are produced. That is, the elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time from when the privilege game is started is periodically acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means, the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path by the distribution means. Thereby, operation | movement of a distribution means can be made the same in every privilege game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to variations in the operation of the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine H9, the entrance setting unit sets the entrance state to the entrance permission state based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition unit. A gaming machine H10 to play.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H9, based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition unit, the entrance setting unit sets the entrance state to the entrance permission state. Therefore, the setting of the flow path by the distribution means and the setting of the entrance by the entrance setting means can be controlled based on the same elapsed time information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the deviation between the setting of the flow path and the setting of the entrance permission state.

<Characteristic group I> (structure in which an object is difficult to rebound)
Previous to a entrance where a game ball can enter, a first area and a second area where a game ball entering the entrance can enter, and either the first area or the second area Distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball mouth, and based on the game balls entering the first area, the player is more likely than the game balls entering the second area In the gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the first state, the distribution means includes a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can pass and a first state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first region And a variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game balls can be distributed to the first area or the second area, and the variable means includes the plurality of flow paths. Of these, the first state and the second state are made variable based on the passage of a game ball through a part of the flow path. Gaming machine I1 which is a shall.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the distribution means can distribute the game ball to the first area and the first area or the second area, which is a state where the game ball can be distributed to the first area by the variable means. To the second state, which is a normal state. The first state and the second state are changed by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through some of the plurality of flow paths through which the game ball can pass.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a game ball enters the first area in the next distribution based on the state of the distribution means. Therefore, from the time when the allocating means is changed to the first state, until the next time the allocating means performs the distribution, the player is given a sense of security and satisfaction with regard to the transition to the special gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be performed while holding.

  In the gaming machine I1, when the plurality of flow paths are in the first state, the first flow path and the second flow path through which game balls can pass, and in the second state, A third flow path and a fourth flow path through which a ball can pass; and the variable means is configured to start from the first state when a game ball passes through the second flow path. The distribution means is changed to the second state, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine I2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path in the first state, and the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path in the second state. Is allowed to pass. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the variable means changes the second state. The distribution means is changed from the state to the first state.

  Thereby, the state of the distribution means can be changed according to which of the plurality of flow paths the game ball passes through, and the flow path through which the game ball that reaches the distribution means next time passes. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to predict the area to be sorted next time by the sorting means depending on the state of the sorting means and the flow path through which the game ball passes. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I2, the gaming machine I3 is provided with a variable restraining means for restraining the sorting means from changing when a game ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the variable restraining means restrains the distribution means from changing when the game ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path. It is possible to prevent the hole from being disadvantageous due to the change to the second state despite passing through the first flow path. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by changing to the first state despite the game ball passing through the fourth flow path.

  In the gaming machine I3, the distribution means is swingable, and the first state is a state in which the distribution means swings on the opposite side to the second state. Game machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I3, the first state is a state in which the sorting means is swung on the opposite side to the second state, so that the current state can be easily made to the player. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine I4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entering area provided inside the ball entrance, and the variable suppression means is arranged in the distribution means and the ball entering area. It is composed of magnets installed in directions that repel each other, and is installed at the closest position when the allocating means swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. A gaming machine I5 that is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are produced. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the entrance area provided in the entrance. The variable suppression means is composed of magnets installed in directions that repel each other in the distribution means and the entrance area, and the distribution means swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. It is installed at the position closest to

  As a result, even if the distribution means swings due to the influence of vibration or the like, it is possible to suppress the state of the distribution means from being switched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution means from being switched from the first state to the second state even though the game ball is not passing through the second flow path, thereby causing a disadvantage to the hall. be able to. In addition, although the game ball does not pass through the third flow path, the state of the sorting means is switched from the second state to the first state, and the player is distrusted to the gaming machine or the hall. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the feeling.

  In the gaming machine I4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entering area provided inside the ball entrance, and the variable suppression means is arranged in the distribution means and the ball entering area. A gaming machine comprising magnets installed in directions that are attracted to each other, wherein the distribution means is installed at a position that is closest to each other in the first state or the second state. I6.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the entrance area provided in the entrance. The variable suppression means is composed of a magnet installed in a direction that attracts the distribution means and the entrance area, and the distribution means is installed at the closest position in the first state or the second state.

  Thereby, since the distribution means in the 1st state or the 2nd state can be made to rest stably with the attractive force by a magnet, it has the effect that it can control that the distribution means swings by the influence of vibration etc. .

  In the gaming machine I5 or I6, the allocating means is a portion that comes into contact with the inner wall of the entrance area when the first state changes from the first state to the second state, and from the second state to the first state. The game machine I7 is characterized in that the portion that contacts the inner wall of the entrance area is made of a material capable of absorbing an impact when variable.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, a portion that comes into contact with the inner wall portion of the entrance area when the first state is changed to the second state, and a portion that comes into contact with the inner wall of the entrance area when the state is changed from the second state to the first state Is made of a material that can absorb shocks.

  As a result, even if the distribution means and the inner wall portion of the ball-entry area contact when the first state is changed to the second state or when the second state is changed to the first state, It is possible to suppress the sorting means from bouncing off due to an impact. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the return to the state before the state of the sorting means is switched due to the rebound even though the state is switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I7, the distribution means is configured to be visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I7, since the sorting means is configured to be visible to the player, the status of the sorting means is the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize which of these states.

  In the gaming machine I8, the distribution means swings to the right or left when viewed from the front.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I8, the sorting means swings to the right or left when viewed from the front, so that the player can easily determine whether the state is the first state or the second state. There is an effect that can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the variable means can change the state of the sorting means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the state of the allocating means is varied based on the weight of the passing game ball. Can be varied by natural movement. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from being changed at an unnatural timing and causing the player to feel distrust with the gaming machine or the hall.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D4, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H10, I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine Z1 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D4, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H10, I1 to I10, and the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D4, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H10, I1 to I10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z3, which is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

<Others>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, whether or not to win a big win based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, whether to shift to the probability variation state, draw separately during the big win Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from being a mere work to obtain a lot of balls, and to play a game with a big hit with a sense of expectation for shifting to a probability fluctuation state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is something to plan.

Some of the above-described gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which game balls can pass in a predetermined area where the game balls can enter only when the probability variation state lottery is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state is reached after the jackpot is ended, depending on which route the game balls are distributed to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-180999)
However, in such gaming machines, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the current jackpot, or to determine whether to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the next jackpot. There wasn't. As a result, each time the jackpot is won, the player will feel uneasy about whether he or she will miss the probability-variation lottery, and even if he wins the jackpot, the player will not rest. There was a problem.

  This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and the next probability is determined according to the route through which the game ball has passed among a plurality of routes for performing the probability variation state lottery. By configuring the route through which game balls can pass in a lottery in a variable state to be changeable, game balls to a route other than a route that shifts to a probability variable state (route that shifts to a low probability state) It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from feeling uneasy every time a big hit is made.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, when a lottery is made to determine whether or not to shift to the probability variation state after the big hit, the game ball is moved to a route other than the route that shifts to the probability variation state (route that shifts to the low probability state). As it progressed, it had shifted to a low probability state without room for reversal. As a result, the lottery becomes unsatisfactory and the player may not be able to fully enjoy the lottery.

  This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and by performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a probability variation state, a configuration in which a lottery is performed in multiple stages is performed. Even if one lottery result shows an unfavorable result for the player, depending on the result of another lottery, the player can expect to win the probability variation state, and the player can fully enjoy the lottery. It aims to provide a game machine that can be used.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when two or more game balls enter the predetermined lottery area in the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the probability variation state once, the game balls in one lottery However, there is a possibility that the gaming machine malfunctions because it passes through a plurality of routes.

  This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a predetermined area for performing a lottery when performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to a probability variation state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent two or more gaming balls from entering.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, the route along which the game ball that has entered the predetermined area travels changes depending on the angle of entry of the game ball to the predetermined area, vibration, or the like. As a result, there is a possibility that the player may be worried that his / her game method may affect the route along which the game ball travels every time a big hit is made. That is, there is a problem that the player feels uneasy every time the jackpot.

  This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the player from feeling uneasy.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main controller (control means)
201 MPU (control means)
203 RAM (storage means)
261 Information output means S1331 Part of single information output means S1623 Part of composite information output means S1921 Part of single information output means S4203 Part of composite information output means

Claims (3)

Information output means configured to include a plurality of output units for outputting information to an external device that performs predetermined processing based on information output from the gaming machine;
Single information output means for outputting single information that is individual information from a plurality of output units of the information output means,
A composite information output unit that outputs composite information that is information output using two or more output units among a plurality of output units included in the information output unit;
The information output means is configured to set at least a period for outputting the single information by the single information output means and a period for outputting the composite information by the composite information output means in a predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by being.   The information output means outputs the unit information and the composite information to an external device that performs a predetermined process based on a signal received from a gaming machine until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is possible. Game information is stored, and storage means capable of holding the stored information for at least a predetermined period after the power is shut off;
Control means for performing control related to the game based on the information of the game stored in the storage means,
The single unit information corresponds to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage unit,
The composite information is information corresponding to at least a part of the game information stored in the storage means, and corresponds to game information different from the game information corresponding to the single information. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein:

Images